Skip to main content

Full text of "Mission Focus, Vol. 18 (1990)"

See other formats


March 1990 
Volume 18 Number 1 


MISSION [7k 

FOCUS W 

Not a Vacuum But a Drought: 

Faith Amid Crisis in Socialism 

N. GERALD SHENK 


It is a strange time to be taking Marxism seriously. Many 
Christians see in various reports of crisis in socialist 
societies a decay, a breakdown, a power vacuum, and 
perhaps an opportunity to take vengeance for historic 
wounds inflicted on Christian churches during the turbu¬ 
lence of a secular order guided by atheists. The reflections 
in this paper reconsider the current situation and its 
implications for the work and witness of the churches. The 
analysis draws heavily on the author s experiences with 
churches of Yugoslavia in the free-church tradition. 

Crisis in socialism 

From recent headlines one gains the impression that 
socialism is in terminal decay around the world, from 
Burma to Poland, from Yugoslavia to the Soviet Union. 
Economic failures, ethnic violence, and worker unrest 
erode the confidence of local peasants and foreign bank¬ 
ers alike. Newsweek recently proclaimed a “war between 
the states” here in the Socialist Federated Republic of 
Yugoslavia, highlighting regional and nationalist tensions 
that culminated in a central meeting of the Communist 
Party under the glare of highly rated TV coverage. Is this 
what it looks like, our local newspaper wondered, when a 
society first turns its back on God, and then God does the 
same to that society? 

The crisis has become real, after early stages of pro¬ 
phetic anticipation and official denial. Taking Yugoslavia 
as an advanced example, the indicators are numerous. 
Inflation is running at an annual rate of more than 200 
percent. Unemployment has not been hidden, and it is 
climbing, while productivity is low. Open criticism of 
social ills in the press accompany decreasing confidence 
in leadership. We see religious activity expand, yet the 
stock answers responding to the renewal of quest among 
generations schooled for spiritual “unmusicality” 1 are 
shallow. 

For years Yugoslavia was the model which attracted the 
attention of those who hoped for serious reforms in the 
socialist world. Indeed, when our personal involvement with 
this country began more than a decade ago, it did seem to 

N. Gerald Shenk and family concluded a three-year assignment 
with Mennonite Central Committee and Eastern Mennonite Board 
in cooperation with the Biblical Theological Institute of Osijek , 
Yugoslavia. Gerald began teaching at Eastern Mennonite Semi¬ 
nary in September 1989, with support from MCC and EMBMC 
for an annual return to the seminary in Yugoslavia (now known 
as the Evangelical Theological Faculty) each January as adjunct 
lecturer. 


have the best of both worlds—basic social securities and 
personal liberties as well as broad public ownership and room 
for individual small business enterprises. Now, however, it is 
often dismissed, as if its experimental value was exhausted 
after a fling with foreign loans which has saddled future 
generations with huge repayment problems. 

Crisis and change 

We should not accept uncritically the widespread notion 
that current difficulties spell an end to the entire socialist 
project. To do so, I believe, would limit us in two ways. 
First, we might exaggerate the possibilities for dramatic 
changes in the religious life of socialist societies. Second, 
we might fail to appreciate the long-term significance of 
small changes which are unfolding in the present. 

Across the socialist world, changes are under way with 
far-reaching consequences. Some of these changes offer 
the prospect of real improvement in living conditions for 
millions of our fellow inhabitants on this small globe. Other 
proposals will merely divert public attention from signals 
of deeper stress. Loyal and critical opposition may be 
allowed to take political form; economic production is 
diversifying into more extensive private ownership; gov¬ 
ernment subsidies in social welfare are being cut drasti¬ 
cally, passing costs more directly to consumers. 

The new willingness to move forward with wholesale 
revamping of existing structures, most notably in the 
Soviet Union during the 1980s, is a direct admission that 
the old order has been deemed inadequate. The search 
for new solutions is broad-ranging, pragmatic, and even 
radical in considering what was only a few years ago 
unthinkable. It now goes beyond mere tinkering with 
administrative arrangements in basic production. Like 
Yugoslavia, now also Poland, Hungary, and the Soviet 
Union recognize that economic reforms must be accom¬ 
panied by substantial political reforms if they are to 
succeed. And this is the point where church folk have 
begun to pay closer attention. 

Implications for churches 

Too much is often made of the impact on churches as a 
criterion by which to evaluate larger social change. One 
would not assess the merits of perestroika (restructuring) 
in the Soviet Union under the ambitious leadership of 
Secretary Gorbachev by its benefits (or otherwise) to the 
organizational life of churches alone. Yet when a whole 
society is convulsed in a crisis with broad consequences, 
we do well to reassess to what extent that crisis alters the 

1 




spiritual landscape also. 

Mennonite Central Committee s Europe director Hugo 
Jantz reports from interviews with Umsiedler (ethnic 
Germans newly arriving from Eastern Europe) that Chris¬ 
tians who were almost uniformly skeptical about the 
prospects for real reform in the socialist system are now 
changing their tune. Among recent emigres not usually 
known for optimism about conditions in their homeland, 
the present situation in their estimation calls for fervent 
prayer by Christians that the program of reforms in the 
Soviet Union will actually succeed. 

Paul Mojzes likens perestroika in the Soviet Union to a 
ride on a roller coaster, including both excitement and 
danger. 2 Support by church members is all the more 
significant when other indications suggest that the room 
for reformist maneuvers is not broad. Lethargy and passive 
resistance among entrenched beneficiaries of the existing 
order may well be strong enough to block many changes 
and heighten popular frustrations. 

Closer inspection suggests a variety of issues at stake for 
Christians. Assuming that the program of reforms is 
eventually realized, we may consider separately the or¬ 
ganizational interests of existing churches, and the per¬ 
sonal benefits for individual church members, in addition 
to the consequences for a society at large. We leave to 
others the task of evaluating the overall impact on whole 
societies, but the distinction between organizational and 
individual concerns in matters of the faith is worth 
pursuing further. This distinction must not be overdrawn, 
since the concerns are thickly interwoven, but current 
conditions of crisis in socialist societies may have varying 
impact at different levels of this analysis. 

Organizational concerns 

Often designated “religious affairs,’’ these are the institu¬ 
tional concerns connecting state and organized religious 
communities. Here we see a whole array of contacts, both 
official and informal, touching on legal, educational, eco¬ 
nomic, and property matters, among others. During the 
onset of a social crisis, religious issues at this institutional 
level seem to move rapidly toward center stage. Long¬ 
standing tensions between churches and the state tend to 
flare up early. 

The prominence of attention paid to disputes along 
these interfaces, however, should not obscure for us an 
underlying reality of at least minimal cooperation culti¬ 
vated between religious and political officials. Apart from 
the basic ideological differences which divide them, each 
side for its own reasons pursues some form of contact with 
the other. Public evidence of this process is relatively rare, 
but a crisis can bring it into the open. 

During the past year, a process of constitutional amend¬ 
ments in Yugoslavia brought up the question of revising 
the provisions on religious activity, even though that was 
not on the original agenda for the amendment process. 
Might this be the time to negotiate a better deal for 
churches? Leading figures in the large Roman Catholic 
community declared that this round of constitutional 
revisions was not the proper forum for seeking improve¬ 
ments for the position of churches in society. Churches 
would work for adjustment at other levels, while profess¬ 
ing satisfaction with the basic arrangements and rights 
provided by the current constitutional order. (This self- 
restraint in favor of stability may have found its most 
visible reward in laudable legislative changes in Croatia 
later that same year to extend health insurance and other 
2 


social benefit coverages to theology students, bringing 
them into a measure of equality with other students after 
a lobbying campaign of more than a decade.) 

More generally, a crisis tends to reinforce the ideolog¬ 
ical autonomy of the churches and underlines the 
churches’ stake in the sociopolitical order, unless partic- 
ularist interests (such as ethnic nationalism) are allowed 
to prevail over the common concern for social well-being 
and stability. 

The crisis does not keep religion in the center of public 
attention for very long. But increased attention to church- 
related issues in the early stages of social crisis leads 
toward more direct reconsideration of the relationship 
between state and society. Issues of church and state are 
soon placed in the broader context of society itself. This 
move can result in further extension of autonomy from 
ideological direction or control into other areas such as 
education, artistic expression, environmental concerns, 
peace and disarmament initiatives, and (quite crucially) 


March 1990 Volume 18 Number 1 

MISSION [7k 

FOCUS W 

1 Not a Vacuum But a Drought: Faith Amid Crisis in 
Socialism 
N. Gerald Shenk 

5 Old and New Possibilities for Mission in Eastern 
Europe 
Hugo Jantz 

7 An Incarnational Approach to Mission in Modern 
Affluent Societies 
Linford Stutzman 

11 Perspective on Mission from Matthew's Gospel 
Earl Zimmerman 

15 In Review 

16 Editorial 


EDITORIAL COUNCIL 

Editor Wilbert R. Shenk 

Managing Editor Willard E. Roth 

Review editors Hans Kasdorf, Henry J. Schmidt 

Other members Peter M. Hamm, Robert L. Ramseyer 

Editorial assistant Betty Kelsey 


MISSION FOCUS (ISSN 0164-4696) is published quarterly at 500 
S. Main St., Elkhart, Indiana, by Mennonite Board of Missions. 
Single copies available without charge. Send correspondence to 
Box 370, Elkhart, IN 46515-0370. Second-class postage paid at 
Elkhart, Indiana, and at additional mailing offices. Lithographed in 
USA. Copyright 1990 by Mennonite Board of Missions. 
POSTMASTER: Send address changes to MISSION FOCUS, Box 
370, Elkhart, IN 46515-0370. 





the legal realm. Indeed, legal protection for the autonomy 
of various activities, including religious, in the newly 
expanded “social space” beyond the former boundaries of 
strict ideological control becomes a central drama, not 
usually traced in headline events but monumental in its 
cumulative effects. 

Impact on individual spirituality 

Improvements for churches as organizations do not always 
lead directly to improvement in conditions for spiritual 
life of the populace at large. 5 If ordinary believers, 
struggling for the bare necessities of life, see a sudden 
increase in benefits for religious leaders at public expense, 
we may anticipate alienation and an increase in criticism 
of the religious hierarchs as well. We do rejoice, of course, 
to hear that more advanced training may be available soon 
for Protestant pastors in Hungary, Poland, and the Soviet 
Union. The dearth of solid theological literature is being 
relieved in many countries by relief on import restrictions, 
and even better, by extensive new publications within the 
countries, as Yugoslavia has experienced for more than 
two decades now. A flurry of new international exchanges 
brings new encouragement to believers previously iso- 
- lated from the larger church. 

None of these new advantages, however, should be 
considered key indicators of the impact of crisis on 
individual spirituality. The real test facing the churches in 
this moment is in the quality of their pastoral care for 
members. Otherwise, given the limited resources available 
at the organizational level, existing leadership is in danger 
of following the direction of the latest permissions into 
endless new auxiliary activities, especially those for which 
foreign funding can easily be secured. Ironically, the 
sudden removal of restrictions can be almost as disruptive 
as an onslaught of new repression. Pastoral care is the 
crucial quality which distinguishes the church from a set 
of schools, publishing houses, and travel agencies. 

The tasks of spiritual leadership require an open recog¬ 
nition that the erosion of public confidence during what 
is well termed the “dusk of ideology” has profound 
spiritual consequences for personal and collective life. If 
it would be unfair to add to the general instability by taking 
institutional advantage of hard times, it would be equally 
irresponsible to ignore the impact on believers in their 
everyday life. 

Suspicion, uncertainty, and interpersonal tensions flare 
up as economic and political conditions erode. While 
some have the energy to consider new and radical changes 
amidst the decay of an aging social order, many are 
dismayed and threatened by the extent of changes com¬ 
pressed into a very short time. 

Tensions that mount at work and in the home overflow 
into the church. Crisis is said to direct people toward God 
again after years and decades of neglect. It can and does 
return some people to the churches, but they can be just 
as critical of what they find there. Some take comfort in 
a return to the archaic certainties of village ancestors and 
the unchanged rhythms of ancient liturgies. Others will 
not find real solace in the old ways of traditional religious 
groups; their pressing needs are not met by the old 
formulas for unmoved masses led by unresponsive hierar¬ 
chies. 

Only a renewal of pastoral care can make the church 
truly available to its own members’ needs during the time 
of deepening crisis. This goal requires a sober reappraisal 
of diversions to be avoided and roads not be taken. 


Power vacuum: political metaphor 

A rapid or extended decline in the fortunes of socialist 
society could lead the largest and strongest religious 
communities into a seriously mistaken strategy. Most of 
them in Yugoslavia (Orthodox, Catholic, and Islamic) have 
had centuries of experience with the advantages of links 
with secular power. Church/state relations in the region 
have been defined primarily by the ongoing struggle for 
dominance in secular affairs, that most ruinous aspect of 
the European Christendom legacy in both its Eastern and 
Western variants. 

Under Marxist guidance, these societies have staked 
their legitimacy on improvements in the material condi¬ 
tions of human existence. Economic decline is not only 
embarrassing, in this scheme it erodes loyalties and lends 
new credibility to social alternatives rooted in other, often 
older sources of legitimacy. A decay in the ordering 
functions of the ruling ideology, to the point that even its 
official bearers scramble to outdo each other in knowing 
skepticism toward its credibility, results in a power vac¬ 
uum that attracts both positive and negative impulses. One 
observer terms it “emancipation in decay.” 

Reasons for restraint 

This ancient struggle over secular power and influence is 
a game which churches must strain to avoid at this critical 
juncture. The notion of a power vacuum is a metaphor of 
political decay, not an analysis of a spiritual condition. The 
reasons for caution are several. 

First, the churches do not enter (or exit) a general social 
crisis with a blank slate. They also have a past and a legacy 
of not fully realized ideals. Their own performance history, 
after all, includes some of the seeds of harsh, repressive, 
even vicious forms which secular reaction took among 
these peoples during the twentieth century. To rejoin the 
ancient battle for control of society is finally to betray the 
peaceable reign of God for a pot of stewed cabbage. Size 
factors may protect the tiny Protestant groups from this 
temptation in most cases, but Catholics and Orthodox are 
not alone in vulnerability toward the perception of a 
political power vacuum. 

Second, although real changes are under way, the 
churches must plan to deal with the same basic social and 
political order for a long time to come. It is the part of 
practical wisdom to reckon on a fair amount of system 
continuity, no matter how dramatic the current crisis 
becomes. Those who defend and those who denounce the 
present order in strident tones are all part of a single 
reality, a social and political complex that will have durable 
consequences, however radical the reforms instituted. 
The basic social reality for the churches shows remarkable 
continuity even through wars and revolutions, as many old 
jokes remind us. 

Even though a current wisecrack defines socialism as 
“the longest and most painful path from capitalism to 
capitalism,” neither a charismatic reformer such as Mr. 
Gorbachev nor a sweeping overhaul of the social regula¬ 
tive mechanisms will achieve a magical exchange of one 
set of social conditions for a completely different set. No 
magical wand is about to wave the forces of communism 
or even historical atheism off the map, replacing them 
with friendly powers to encourage the growth of churches. 
Though we know that no system lasts forever, much of the 
present cultural complex will remain, and that conviction 
should prevent unseemly gloating over the ideological 
deadends of discredited public leaders. 


3 


Third, the life of churches in these regions is perpetually 
subject to the larger reality of endless bureaucratic regu¬ 
lation. It seems that permissions are required for every 
aspect of life, be it large or small. Indeed, the privilege of 
regulating the records of such basic functions as birth, 
marriage, and death was one of the first to be wrested 
from the churches by the socialist authorities following 
the revolution. Similar sensitivity extends to borders and 
the flow of people, goods and ideas across national and 
cultural boundaries. Yugoslavia, even after several decades 
of gradual progress toward a more open social system, 
retains much of the structure for extensive regulation. This 
is an obdurate fact of life for the churches of the region, 
and many other things would need to change before this 
feature is significantly altered for the churches. 

A further impulse to caution for us is the rebuke of 
Jonah, who had been content to sit and watch the collapse 
of that great city he detested, wicked Nineveh. Having 
delivered his denunciations, he relished the prospect of 
observing the destruction, yet God had a bitter lesson for 
him: even an “evil empire’’ is not beyond the reach of 
God’s mercy. Jonah’s mission to that society succeeded, 
according to our account, and to his own mistaken dismay. 

No refuge in separation 

The churches in these lands have long taken refuge in the 
rigorous separation of religion from the political sphere as 
mandated by constitutional provisions, but this is no longer 
an adequate reason for avoiding public responsibility, a 
civic awareness of the traumas experienced by ordinary 
citizens. As central authorities fall into dismay over an 
inability to legislate solutions for urgent human needs, the 
churches must seek faithful responses at the local level, 
throwing their weight behind every effort at human 
solidarity and compassion. Amid dramatic declines in 
living standards, the followers of Christ have a new 
opportunity to explore the joyful sacrifices of sharing 
resources more effectively, even while bureaucrats around 
them resort to much resented restrictions. 

It is time for Christians to assert with full confidence 
that God has not abandoned the peoples of socialist 
societies. No matter how turbulent become the discon¬ 
tents of socialist modernity, this is not the hour for greedy 
pursuit of organizational advantages for the churches at 
the expense of the socialist system. 

We need a double dose of skepticism these days. The 
first is taken with journalist reports that highlight only the 
traumas, bringing prompt word of potential tremors but 
hardly ever noting the “newsless” event when a sem¬ 
blance of normalcy is restored. “Chicken Little” stories 
about the pending crash of a wayward satellite far out¬ 
number the reports on its uneventful demise in a remote 
corner of ocean. In the case of the Yugoslav “war between 
the states,” which we found on the cover of Newsweek at 
our local kiosk, not a single word appeared during the 
following month to indicate that the acute tensions had 
been successfully defused. 

The second dose of skepticism should be administered 
when we hear sweeping claims of the possibilities for 
Christian expansion while socialist systems are convulsed 
in turmoil. Inasmuch as real improvements for the church¬ 
es are possible, they should not be trumpeted as evidence 
of a defeat for other temporal powers. 

At the same time, we must recognize an openness for 
change, including elements that are genuine and hopeful. 
This is no time to sit under the vine and await the collapse. 
4 


We have a calling and a duty in every land to offer prayer 
support and goodwill toward authorities who are respon¬ 
sible before God to secure order and protect the innocent, 
making room for the goodness of ordinary life. Where 
these ordering functions are fulfilled by Marxist powers, 
our duty is not diminished by the fact of their philosoph¬ 
ical atheism or their historic antipathy toward the corrup¬ 
tions of institutional power in the churches. 

Now we observe that communist authorities are losing 
the effective sanctions once wielded to prevent believers 
from “fanatically” living out their faith. The rewards of 
privilege and security, jobs, education, and health care are 
declining for all but a very small elite. Believers fare little 
worse than others, when all face reduced living standards 
and new limits on social services. This, too, can increase 
freedom for authentic devotion to take practical effect in 
ordinary life. 

Conclusion 

So before we call down the curtain of history on the 
socialist chapter, Christians would do well to reflect on 
the enduring impact which Marxism and the socialist 
experiment have had on our century. They have placed 
their goals on the agenda of many societies—basic social 
security, the dignity of human labor, and an egalitarian 
commitment. Even in failure, they set the mark against 
which other efforts continue to be measured. Churches 
will not go far by preaching the virtues of insecurity and 
inequality, just because the Marxist project is stumbling 
spectacularly near the edge of the stage. 

We must prepare ourselves to show compassion for 
ideological opponents now seized with misgivings and 
haunting doubts. More than depression at the bottom of 
a cycle awaits those who place their final confidence in 
the benefits of material production. We have never agreed 
to reduce our faith to nationalism or an ideology in 
competition with Marxism. The points of comparison and 
contrast are always available for dialogue, but the truth we 
live for is not distracted by cycles of the economy. 

We should renew our dialogue with nominal Christian¬ 
ity, not just at its organizational centers, but in its far-flung 
corners as well. We do not know how dark the night must 
become before the remaining light in the large traditional 
churches again becomes a source of true hope and 
sustenance for the unmoved masses. But we Protestants 
in the free-church heritage are custodians of a more 
intense concentration, for some moderns a more accessi¬ 
ble reformulation, of ancient truths translated into life. 

Rather than a power vacuum opening new temptations 
for secular power and historic vengeance, we see in the 
religious organizations the withered fruits of a lengthy 
spiritual drought. Unwatered by the recognition of God’s 
graceful dealings with our neighbors and communities, 
whole regions have fallen into a neglect of spiritual roots. 
Whole generations have gone long without nurturing that 
everyday awareness of the creating, sustaining power that 
walked among us in the person of Jesus Christ. 

Factual acquaintance with salvation history, the minimal 
knowledge that even the average “unchurched” North 
American recalls from childhood, has fallen to very low 
levels in these parts of Europe. Yet there remains an 
incipient awareness embedded within the various cul¬ 
tures, even a resonance with the things of the spirit that 
neglect and counterfeits have not entirely erased. A 
recent conference of European piano teachers, meeting 
in Yugoslavia, included a presentation by a musician from 



the Soviet Union. His lecture drew special attention 
because, in contrast to his predecessors of earlier years, 
the woodenness of prescribed ideology had been re¬ 
moved. In its place came a call for a restoration of spiritual 
insight in teaching music, a return to the values of truth, 
goodness, and beauty. Chief sources cited? Augustine and 
Dostoevsky. 

There is now more thirst than ever before in socialist 
society for a calm and confident effort to put our best 
knowledge of truth and goodness and beauty to the test 
of life under pressure. Let us have done with dire 
predictions and detours into the vacuum of political power 
and gloating over the demise of socialist systems. In the 
dusk of ideology, a sober renewal of pastoral care becomes 
the most attractive feature of life together in faith. In this 
task the churches face no serious competition whatsoever. 
The drought has lasted long enough. 

Notes 

1. The literature on crisis in Yugoslavia is extensive. 
Sociologist Zdenko Roter of the University of Ljubljana 
calls it “a long-wave’ crisis, deep and structural. It encom¬ 
passes all sectors of societal and individual existence, from 
the economy, culture, and education to politics, morality, 
and religion. Individual and social life as a whole is 
disturbed." Zdenko Roter, “Yugoslavia at the Crossroads: 
A Sociological Discourse," Occasional Papers on Religion 
in Eastern Europe , Vol. 8. No. 2 (May 1989), p. 11. Cf. also 
Silvano Bolcic, Razvoj i kriza jugoslovenskog drustva u 
socioloskoj perspektivi (Beograd: Studentski izdavacki cen- 
tar, 1983); Josip Zupanov, Marginalije o drustvenoj krizi 
(Zagreb: Globus, 1983). On specifically religious dimen¬ 
sions of crisis, cf. Srdjan Vrcan, Od krize religije k religiji 
krize (Zagreb: Skolska knjiga, 1986). 


2. Paul Mojzes, “On a Roller Coaster: Religion and 
Perestroika,” Occasional Papers on Religion in Eastern 
Europe , Vol. 8, No. 5 (October 1988), p. 22. 

3. These dynamics for the early stage in Yugoslavia are 
traced in my dissertation on the public debate of The 
Social Role of Religion in Contemporary Yugoslavia (Ev¬ 
anston: Northwestern University, 1987). 

4. Cf. interview with Ivan Prpic, “Drustvo i drzava," Nose 
teme (Zagreb), Vol. 32, No. 5, May 1988, pp. 1147-1165. 

5. Outlining pitfalls in the study of church-state rela¬ 
tions, Pedro Ramet has framed a similar question most 
cogently: “Should a worsening of church-state relations in 
a communist state necessarily be assumed to be welcome 
to state authorities or inimical to the faith itself?” See 
Pedro Ramet, Cross and Commissar: The Politics of Reli¬ 
gion in Eastern Europe and the USSR (Bloomington and 
Indianapolis: Indiana University Press, 1987), p. 182. 

6. Timothy Garton Ash, “The Empire in Decay," The 
New York Review of Books , Vol. 35, No. 14 (September 
29,1988), p. 56; the same author’s later collection of essays 
on Central Europe is the best current resource for under¬ 
standing the background of sweeping changes at the end 
of the decade: The Uses of Adversity (New York: Random 
House). 


Author’s postscript: This article originated at the end of 1988, 
prior to the revolutionary events in Eastern Europe during 1989. 
Its focus of concern can now be applied to the further develop¬ 
ments in the German Democratic Republic, Czechoslovakia, and 
Romania as well The unfolding drama has reinforced the con¬ 
viction that churches have a crucial role to play in the quest for 
peaceful but radical change. 


Old and New Possibilities for Mission in Eastern Europe 

HUGO JANTZ 


The ripples of change of the early Gorbachev era have 
become a tidal wave. The question for all Eastern Europe 
is no longer if, but when, how rapid, and how profound 
the changes will be. Most dramatic has been the punctur¬ 
ing of the Wall until it has become merely a symbol of the 
infamous barrier. 

The joy is obvious, often accompanied by tears. It was 
deeply moving to stand at the Potsdam opening in the 
Wall and see people and Trabis (East German cars) 
passing in both directions through a huge breach in that 
once impregnable barrier. It is the most beautiful gap in 
all the world. 

We have seen, in the course of recent administrative 
visits, the effects of glasnost and perestroika in the USSR, 


Hugo Jantz oversees Mennonite Central Committee program in 
Europe, from an office in Neuwied, West Germany. He and his 
wife, Katherine, are from Winnipeg Manitoba, and are members 
of Maples Mennonite Brethren Church. 


Poland, Yugoslavia, and now Eastern Germany and East 
Berlin. We have seen it and wrestled with the questions: 
“What is our mission now?" and “How should we re¬ 
spond?" 

Responding to changes 

It seems that, before all else, we have much to learn in 
the face of the new reality. How easily the North American 
mentality would lead us to plunge into the new “openings" 
to do our strategical thing. It probably involves learning 
that change in Eastern Europe does not mean a change 
to Western forms of capitalism and democracy. 

Among many other things, we in the church, we who 
are so consciously in mission, ought to learn to understand 
how Christian faith and life, in and out of the church, were 
a factor in what is happening in Eastern Europe today. 

For seven decades in the USSR and more than four in 
the rest of Eastern European countries, Christians and 
people of genuine goodwill have absorbed indignities, 
abuse, torture, and discrimination. They have lost their 

5 


families, their freedom, their social and work position, 
their property and their lives. What do we know about 
this kind of cross bearing and the resurrection that must 
follow? Can we take our place beside those who thus bore 
the cross—and can we take any effective action—until we 
at least begin to understand and identify with the experi¬ 
ence and the theology that were forged in the crucible of 
suffering? Perhaps a major factor leading Gorbachev and 
others to g lasnost and perestroika is the effect of genera¬ 
tions of Christians and uncounted thousands of godly men 
and women remaining faithful unto death, not overcome 
by evil, but overcoming evil with good (Rom. 23:21). We 
do well to ponder such a possibility and to discover its 
meaning for us. 

For at least a decade and a half, a significant movement 
has happened among the intelligentsia of, for instance, the 
Soviet Union. Profoundly disillusioned by the failure of 
the system, the philosophical and theological hollowness 
of its ideology, and the self-seeking corruption of the great 
and the not-so-great, they began to seek another way. For 
many the way led to Christian faith and the Orthodox 
Church. It seems of vital importance to understand that 
journey and its effect on changes in the Soviet Union and 
other Eastern countries. An important question is: “Why 
do the majority of converted intellectuals move into the 
Orthodox Church?” 

We are told that, especially in the Soviet Union, the 
exiling of Christians to work camps in every part of the 
country has brought the reality of Christ and the church 
to every major population center, new and old. No mission 
strategy could have done it as well, we are told. What can 
we learn from this, together with our brothers and sisters 
in Eastern Europe? 

After decades of the promotion and promulgation of 
atheism in Eastern Europe, there seems a greater aware¬ 
ness of God and less of a spirit of secularism in Eastern 
Europe than in the West. Has the Spirit of God rushed, 
like a powerful wind from heaven, into the vacuum? We 
need to learn to understand this phenomenon. 

All who have followed the developments in East Ger¬ 
many have been impressed and deeply moved by the very 
visible and audible role of the church. It was thrilling to 
see pastors, very low-key, sending people onto the streets 
to demonstrate nonviolently, and then to view those 
demonstrations, even when augmented by tens of thou¬ 
sands, even hundreds of thousands, remain nonviolent. 
Suddenly, it seemed, the people were speaking, by word 
and action, in categories that left armed police and soldiers 
powerless. 

Some possible opportunities for mission in Eastern 
Europe 

One approach would be to commission our best church 
statesmen, oriented to servanthood, to work alongside 
church leaders in the countries now open for such a 
ministry. I am thinking of an extended tour of ministry 
similar to what Jacob Tilitsky undertook in May and June 
1989. Much time should be available to talk one to one, 
to small groups, and to gatherings of church leaders, as 
they wrestle with being the church in a context of 
freedom. 

I think we have Christian intellectuals in North America 
and Western Europe who can dialogue and worship 
together with their East European counterparts and ex¬ 
perience enormous mutual enrichment. This would in¬ 
volve the important component of interpreting Western 
6 


church and society, with all our wrinkles, to them. 

In most socialist countries, industry, business, agricul¬ 
ture, and social services are in shambles. Some govern¬ 
ments are willing to accept help from anywhere and from 
anyone. The church, until only recently ordered to stay 
within the four walls of its meeting places, is now being 
challenged to become involved in cleaning up the mess 
and in rebuilding. The church knows little about getting 
people involved, though voluntary service to the old, the 
chronically ill, and to patients in psychiatric wards is 
beginning to take place. The efforts of the church are 
made more complicated by bureaucratic barriers and 
inefficiency. 

It appears that we could respond to these needs in 
several ways: 

1. By finding well-experienced, culture-sensitive, 
and flexible consultants to work with the church and 
government leaders responsible for church-based vol¬ 
untary service. Such persons might be able to conduct 
seminars in strategic places and institutions, e.g., being 
resources to people working with geriatric and psychi¬ 
atric patients. 

2. Poland and Yugoslavia might be especially open 
to the kind of help Mennonite Central Committee gives 
in agricultural development, and MEDA or SELF- 
HELP, in the area of cottage and small industry. 

It should now be possible to develop a more efficient, 
better targeted, and more even flow of Bibles as well as 
Christian and biblical literature to Eastern countries. The 
euphoria over the “wide open doors” must not blind us to 
the possibility of corrupt and unfair entrepreneurial ex¬ 
ploitation of this aspect of the Eastern European reality. 
We need to have people with vision and good business 
sense help us with this very important ministry. 

It seems almost every institution/seminary-trained 
church worker would be willing to accept one or all of 
the following resource people to work and teach with their 
respective faculties: 

1. People who can communicate by life and word 
Anabaptist thought and history. 

2. People who can help train prospective church 
workers and even pastors already in service in pastoral 
counseling and biblical, exegetical preaching. 

3. English-as-a-Second-Language (ESL) teachers. 
Because of the dearth of biblical literature in East 
European languages, it is an advantage, for the present, 
for seminary-level students to learn to read English. 

Many brothers and sisters in the Eastern countries could 
benefit from spending time in both Western churches and 
society and in the third world. Mennonite agencies could 
help facilitate this. 

We are told there are some 25 well-trained young 
Christians in East Germany who would be willing to serve 
as volunteers in other countries, including third-world 
countries. We believe MCC, for instance, should try with 
concerted effort to make this happen. The effect of such 
an experience on people who have been forcibly isolated 
from interaction with the rest of the world could be 
enormous, and the message they might carry back to their 
home churches could multiply the effect. 

We need also to work harder and more carefully at 
finding people in the Eastern countries for the MCC 


Intermenno Program. This is fraught with problems, but 
we must simply do the best we can. 

Some concerns 

There are Mennonites in the Soviet Union and in East 
Germany only. Should we start Mennonite mission work 
with the goal of starting “Mennonite” churches? Or should 
we be what we can be to all churches, simply to bring our 
particular witness to as broad a spectrum of church and 
society as possible? 


How do we engage in mission, when almost all of our 
present contacts in Eastern countries are with church 
leaders whose prestige and authority tend to decrease as 
g lasnost and perestroika increase? How can we begin to 
relate in effective ways to the new and younger generation 
of leaders who are now emerging or are waiting in the 
wings? Great wisdom and some courage are called for 
here. 


An Incarnationa! Approach to Mission in 
Modern Affluent Societies 

LINFORD STUTZMAN 


Why do our efforts of sharing the gospel in modern, 
affluent societies have so little impact in contrast to the 
revolutionary effects that the witness of Jesus, Paul, and 
Hans Hut had in their societies? Are modern, affluent 
societies so fundamentally different from earlier societies 
that the good news is no longer perceived to be especially 
good or even particularly threatening? Are post-Enlight- 
enment changes such as rationalism, mass affluence, ur¬ 
banization, and technology to blame for the apathy? 
Perhaps the problem is not so much that society has 
changed but that the church and its missionaries have 
changed in relation to society. Let us examine this possi¬ 
bility. 

Social location: A crucial feature of the incarnation and 
authentic witness 

It was not identification with humankind in general that 
shaped the nature of Jesus’ ministry, rather it was the 
deliberate identification with particular social groupings 
within his society which affected how his ministry was 
perceived—the impact of his words, how the good news 
of the kingdom was communicated, to whom it appealed, 
and to whom it sounded threatening. 

The location of the Anabaptists in sixteenth-century 
European society, although not necessarily chosen, could 
be seen as crucial in determining the message, method, 
and impact of the early Anabaptist movement s evange¬ 
lists. 

It seems that missionaries of the Mennonite Church of 
North America generally occupy a position within society 
which is fundamentally different from that of Jesus, the 
early church, or the Anabaptist movement. This social 
location works as a handicap, giving rise to inauthentic 
methods of proclaiming the good news, restricting the 
prophetic content of the message, and minimizing the 
impact of the missionary’s endeavor on the whole society. 
Why and how does this occur? 

The strategic approach to mission: Beginning in the 
wrong place 

The serious missionary, working in what Newbigin calls 
the “most challenging missionary frontier of our time” 
(1968:20), likely responds to the initial lack of impact of 
his or her efforts by thinking strategically. This is under¬ 
standable. The trained missionary has been taught to think 


strategically, and the society in which the missionary 
works reinforces the strategic approach to problems of 
“marketing.” There seems to be no other alternative. 

The strategic approach focuses on the felt needs of 
individuals in society and the identification of “target 
groups.” These target groups generally fall into two basic 
categories—the obviously needy and the disguised needy. 

The obviously needy, according to the standards of mod¬ 
ern, affluent society, are the “losers,” such as the unem¬ 
ployed, uneducated, criminals, and addicts. They are a 
minority and tend to be from the lower socioeconomic 
classes. The missionary either seeks to identify with the 
obviously needy or to extend ministry to them from a 
socially distant position. In either case, church planting 
among the obviously needy tends to be slow and extremely 
difficult. 

The disguised needy are the majority of society with 
very real but less obvious problems such as loneliness, 
guilt, lack of fulfillment, or starvation for love. The dis¬ 
guised needy tend to be from the middle and upper 
socioeconomic classes. The strategic-thinking missionary 
is likely to be attracted to this target group for many 
reasons: for its sheer size, for the nature of needs which 
seem ready-made for the gospel, and for the prospect of V 
building a church among financially successful, goal-ori- J 
ented, energetic, and organized individuals. 

By strategically selecting the needs-determined target^ 
group, the missionary inevitably locates him- or herself 
socially and from there seeks to adapt the message to the 
needs of the target group. Strategic thinking, influenced 
by the secular market-based approach, cannot do other¬ 
wise, for the consumers personally determine the nature 
of their needs and select their solutions. Newbigin ob¬ 
serves: “In contrast to traditional societies, modern West¬ 
ern society leaves its members free ... to adopt and hold 
their own views about what is good and desirable ...” 
(1968:16). 

This is not to say that the gospel does not meet the felt 
needs of individuals, but it does indicate how the message 
is shaped by strategic thinking. Tending to weaken the 
prophetic, revolutionary character of the gospel within 
society, it ends with a message tailored to meet the 
self-diagnosed problems of individuals. The appeal of the 
gospel is limited to individuals, and any possible social 
impact is likely contained within specific social groupings. 

7 




What is wrong with the strategic approach if churches 
are being planted in the process? Australian Stuart Fowler 
comments: 

The result is that, in spite of having, in principle, the same 
world-shaking, liberating faith as the first century disci¬ 
ples, we ... are not seriously disturbing the world order 
of our day as those disciples disturbed the first century 
world order. The world has neutralized us most effec¬ 
tively by containing us within a narrowly confined area 
of life in a pact of peaceful coexistence. The price we pay 
is a fundamental mutilation of the gospel. (1983:55) 

As Anabaptist missionaries we seek to be not only 
effective, but faithful to Jesus’ example as well. What are 
the alternatives to the strategic approach which enable 
both effective and faithful mission to happen, which 
enable us to be like Jesus in the world? 

The social spectrum: A tool for an incarnational 
approach 

Jesus told his disciples to “open your eyes and look at the 
fields! They are ripe for harvest’’ (John 4:35b). Donald 
McGavran urges missionaries to “develop church growth 
eyes’’ (1980:185) by doing sociological research. Are Jesus 
and McGavran urging us to do exactly the same thing? 

The modern scientific method has given rise to a 
completely different way of understanding society than 
that of Jesus’ disciples. Modern sociology determines the 
various groupings within society, not by measuring recep¬ 
tivity to the gospel, but rather by measuring, among other 
things, the socioeconomic levels according to established 
criteria. Missiological analysis of a given society’s recep¬ 
tivity to the gospel is measured in terms of these existing 
categories which seem to be appropriate and helpful tools 
for strategic purposes. 

What is needed for understanding the incarnational 
approach is a framework for determining social groupings 
according to receptivity of the good news rather than 
socioeconomic categories and felt needs of individuals. 
The model of society which follows attempts this by using 
the criteria of marginality, power , and hope. By looking at 
society in this way, it may be possible to identify Jesus’ 
social location and why it was chosen. It may be possible 
to understand where change (receptivity and conversion) 
is most likely to occur, not only at the individual level, but 
in society as a whole. Finally, it may enable the church in 
its mission to be socially in modern, affluent societies, like 
Jesus was in his. 

Marginality describes the minority in modern affluent 
societies that is not integrated into the mainstream Major¬ 
ity of society for various reasons. Relationships of the 
Marginalized are often characterized by individual or 
group isolation. On the opposite end of the spectrum is 
the Establishment minority who represent institutional 
and social power within society. Relationships of the 
Establishment may be highly organized and institutionally 
determined. Between the Marginalized and Establish¬ 
ment minorities are the Majority who, although not di¬ 
rectly involved at the top levels of power, nevertheless 
participate in and benefit from it. The Majority are socially 
integrated with organic and organizational networks and 
are marginalized only from the top levels of institutional 
power occupied by the Establishment minority. 

Power is closely related to marginalization. The distinc¬ 
tions are between the kinds of power available across the 
8 


spectrum. The marginalized end of the spectrum is char¬ 
acterized by the lack of power to change either self or 
circumstances for the better. The power here tends to be 
reactionary, survival power which often takes negative and 
destructive forms. It may be chaotic and unpredictable 
and illicit fear in others. It is viewed from the Establish¬ 
ment perspective as illegitimate power. 

“Legitimate’’ power is concentrated on the other ex¬ 
treme end of the social spectrum. It tends to be stable and 
predictable and is used to preserve the status quo of 
society and its institutions. 

Between the two extreme ends of the spectrum is the 
Majority. Two basic options of power, originating from 
opposite ends of the spectrum, appeal to the Majority who 
have the freedom to choose how to respond. One option 
is for individuals in the Majority to align themselves with 
the institutional power of the Establishment in hopes of 
maintaining or improving the status quo. This is a most 
popular choice in times of prosperity and stability because 
of the apparent success of the Establishment promises. 

The other option originates because of the apparent 
inadequacies of the status quo, the failure of the Estab¬ 
lishment to “deliver the goods” it has promised. The power 
of the disenchanted of the Majority is often expressed in 
the form of ideals, visions, and dreams which become 
popular, forming the basis for “people movements,” calls 
for revolution, and in extreme cases, the use of popularly 
supported violence. 

The last category, hope, relates closely to the power 
choices. The Marginalized at one extreme end of the 
spectrum have little motivational hope, sometimes ex¬ 
pressing this hopelessness in destructive behavior toward 
themselves, others, or both. Hope, however, can be po¬ 
tentially raised from outside of this category. On the 
opposite end of the spectrum are those whose hope lies 
in the preservation or improvement of the status quo. 
Hope in this category tends to be at once conservative 
and pragmatically concerned with self-preservation. 

For the Majority between the two extremes, hope is 
alive, at least potentially, and has two basic options. From 
the side of the Establishment comes the enticement of 
the status quo and the possibility of progress for society 
in general and personal happiness in particular. The values 
of the Establishment, with their conservative and self-pre¬ 
serving bias, seem to be obviously correct to many of the 
Majority, and their hope is basically the Establishment 
hope of working within the status quo. 

The other basic hope option originates from the 
Marginalized end of the social spectrum, for it is there 
that the human needs are most obvious and the deficien¬ 
cies of the status quo are most evident. Hope takes the 
form of visions for the possibility of a better world. This 
kind of hope may result in people calling for fundamental 
social change. People movements of all kinds, including 
violent revolution, rise out of people in the Majority 
category who are motivated by hope of change to the 
extent that they are willing to take personal risks in order 
to achieve and participate in a new social reality. This kind 
of hope of the Majority can potentially arouse the atten¬ 
tion and even raise the hopes of the Marginalized. This 
sharing of hope can result in a solidarity of some of the 
Marginalized with many of the Majority. It can eventually 
impact all of society. It threatens the Establishment. 

Diagram A on the following page represents the social 
spectrum of modern, affluent societies using the catego¬ 
ries above. 



Diagram A 



The position on the spectrum is not established solely 
by socioeconomic status. This is a factor, but in modern, 
affluent societies the freedom of choice in the area of 
values combined with the access to information permits 
movement horizontally on the spectrum. 

Major shifts among the largest portion of society’s 
members occurs rather easily between A and B in terms 
of both power and hope, depending on the social climate. 
This can occur without necessarily breaking the organ¬ 
ic/organizational relationships of the Majority category. 
The extreme ends of the spectrum can be seen as being 
more static. 

The minorities on the opposite ends of the spectrum 
have the least in common and, therefore, the least impact 
on each other in terms of substantial social change. The 
Majority, located socially next to both the Marginalized 
and the Establishment minorities, has the potential of 
impacting both. 

Several additional observations, when placed against the 
backdrop of this view of society, will help to understand 
how “God uses social forces to bring men under the 
influence of the gospel” (Pickett 1933:168). What role do 
human aspirations, visionary longings, and utopian dreams 
play in receptivity? 

It would seem that much of these could be classified as 
a basic God-given “hunger and thirst for righteousness,” 
a longing for justice, peace, and goodness—in short, a 
longing for the kingdom. These longings are fostered 


whenever human failure and evil is apparent in society. 
In times when the social conditions are ripe, they result 
in “people movements.” 

It would seem that authentic Christian movements, 
beginning with the early church and occurring throughout 
history, including the ^ ..abaptist movement, occur when 
the Spirit of God intersects with the aspirations of people, 
the human longings for the kingdom. These could be 
called “people movements of the Spirit” rather than either 
“people movements” or “spiritual movements.” 

Based on these observations, several hypotheses can 
now be made. 

1. Jesus incarnated and preached the good news of the 
kingdom from social position A within the social spectrum. 
His message made immediate sense to those in social 
position A, whose hope lay in the possibility for immediate 
change. From this position, Jesus exposed the fallacy of 
Establishment hope. At the same time he refused the use 
of coercive power and violence. Jesus raised the hope of 
the Marginalized from a position of proximity. Because of 
this proximity, Jesus’ message was at once both popular to 
those toward the marginalized end of the spectrum and 
threatening to those toward the other end. 

2. Although individuals were attracted from both ex¬ 
tremes of the spectrum, the church emerged from within 
the middle category, primarily around position A among 
those whose hope lay in the possibility for change and 
were ready to take personal risks in order to achieve it. 

9 



Diagram B 



These people were concerned both about their own and 
others’ lot in life and were motivated by popular social 
and religious ideals. Jesus’ preaching of the kingdom 
corresponded to their dreams of change. They were 
integrated socially. The church, as it gained momentum 
as a people movement of the Spirit, increasingly chal¬ 
lenged the Establishment prophetically and attracted the 
Marginalized by visibly demonstrating the kingdom life 
and the power of Jesus’ way. The church, socially in the 
same position as Jesus, was the “authentic witness.’’ 

3. The Anabaptist movement, as with other people 
movements of the Spirit before and after, began in much 
the same way, where the preaching of the kingdom 
coincided with the longing for the kingdom in all its forms, 
among those whose hope lay in change, and who were 
willing to take risks in order to achieve it—that part of 
society around social position A. 

4. The temptation for churches in modern, affluent 
societies is to locate socially around position B. From this 
position the church attempts to reach individuals from all 
parts of the spectrum but succeeds mainly with those 
around position B. The church in this position tends to 
ignore, condemn, or “evangelize” individuals in social 
position A. This results in the “fundamental mutilation of 
the gospel mentioned earlier. 

The social position of Jesus and the community of 
authentic witness is illustrated in Diagram B. 

The incarnational approach 

Choosing the social location of Jesus 
It would seem very difficult for the missionary and the 
emerging church to represent the good news of the 
kingdom as Jesus did in the world without being socially 
in the world as Jesus was. Authenticity in witness begins, 
then, with the fundamental choice of the incarnation: the 
social location of the witness within society. Can the 
church in its mission in modern, affluent societies choose 
to be socially like Jesus was in his society? It seems that 
this is indeed possible. 

My recent survey done with five churches started by 
Mennonites in the city of Dublin, London, Hong Kong, 
Tokyo, and Munich indicates that Mennonite missionaries 
and the churches they have started, although all middle- 
class, represent radically different positions on the social 
spectrum. Some of the positions on the social spectrum 
seem to be the result of deliberate choices. This research 
indicates that Mennonite missionaries, by consciously 
10 


choosing to identify around position A, can succeed in 
planting churches of position A people, a church which 
has the potential of attracting both the Marginalized and 
the Establishment individuals, raising the hopes of the 
Marginalized and prophetically impacting the Establish¬ 
ment end of society. 

If it is true that missionaries can make incarnational 
choices, how can this be done? 

Implementing the incarnational approach 
Instead of coming to a new field with clear goals and a 
strategy to reach them, Mennonite missionaries could 
come with a clear commitment to identify with the people 
most likely to receive the message of the gospel, and who 
can then themselves represent the gospel with authentic¬ 
ity which impacts all society. This begins by the missionary 
forming organic personal relationships naturally and pri¬ 
marily to people within social grouping A, both Christian 
and non-Christian. 

Two things are needed to ensure that this occurs: 
missionaries who are committed to identify with their new 
society from within social grouping A, and a policy by the 
mission board which gives these missionaries the freedom, 
time, and support needed for the task. 

Identification with social grouping A involves listening 
and relating from the outset to those in the new society 
who could be labeled “integrated critics.” This refers to 
those who are integrated socially into the mainstream of 
society and at the same time are aware of, and concerned 
by, the needs and shortcomings within it to the extent that 
they actively seek, promote, and engage in alternatives to 
the status quo. The integrated critic is not only already 
aware of his society and its shortcomings, he is aware of 
the possibilities for change. To be negatively critical about 
society as a newly arrived missionary, or a marginalized 
person, although common, is hardly helpful. The inte¬ 
grated critic, as a full participant in society involved in 
working for change, can help the missionary understand 
not only the problems within that society but current 
responses to those problems and the motivating hopes of 
the activists. 

There are several practical ways for implementing the 
incarnational approach to mission: 

As integration into social position A within society is the 
missionary’s first priority, a part-time voluntary position 
with a Christian or secular organization located within that 
position could be an immediate goal. This allows the 




missionary to begin contributing immediately to the new 
society and to be seen as legitimate by all. This puts the 
missionary in touch with relationship networks within 
both the Christian and secular communities. It gives the 
freedom to explore needs and possible Christian re¬ 
sponses with others who are organically integrated into 
society. 

The missionary as an individual, and the fellowship as 
it begins to form, should join the indigenous Christian and 
secular networks and movements which share common 
vision and do so with a clear identity as Christians in 
general and Mennonites in particular. Both the joining 
and the identity are important. Mennonites, with a tradi¬ 
tion which began in social position A and which has been 
more or less maintained ever since, can, by joining hands 
with others, contribute to and enrich those expressions of 
faithfulness in the new society wherever they occur. These 
relationships can make possible a prophetic challenge to 
both church and society without being in competition with 
indigenous expressions of faithfulness as imported denom¬ 
inational programs, starting with the strategic approach, 
may tend to be. 

The goal, in relating to and becoming identified with 
* these networks and movements as Mennonite missionar¬ 
ies, is to participate in a “people movement of the Spirit” 
or contribute to the possibility of one, rather than in 
denominational church planting. This is not to say that 
denominational establishment and growth can be or 
should be avoided. On the contrary Mennonites will 


flourish as part of a “people movement of the Spirit”—as 
will Baptists, Catholics, Anglicans, and Pentecostals. The 
point is that the concept of church planting and church 
growth, built on strategic presuppositions, seems to carry 
with it some intrinsic competitive notions which may work 
very well in bringing people into a particular congregation 
but may not contribute to the long-range effect of the 
gospel in modern, affluent societies. 

The challenge of the incarnation 

“As you sent me into the world, I have sent them into the 
world” (John 17:18). Is the Mennonite Church in modern, 
affluent societies like Jesus in the world? Are Mennonite 
missionaries in these societies taking the unique opportu¬ 
nity of beginning like Jesus in these new areas? The 
challenge is to respond to the call of Jesus, in spite of the 
difficulty and cost, to join him where he is in the world. 

References Cited 

Fowler, Stuart 

1983 “The Willing Captive,” Interchange 32: 54-61. 

McGavran, Donald R. 

1980 Understanding Church Growth , Grand Rapids: William B. 
Eerdmans Publishing Co. 

Newbigin, Lesslie 

1986 Foolishness to the Greeks: The Gospel and Western Culture, 
London: SPCK. 

Pickett, Jarrel Waskom 

1933 Christian Mass Movements in India, Lucknow: Lucknow Pub¬ 
lishing House. 


Perspective on Mission from Matthew's Gospel 

EARL ZIMMERMAN 


The past century of mission activity has been both exciting 
and challenging for the church. It has pushed us into new 
understandings both of ourselves as Christians and of the 
world in which we serve. It has brought new life into many 
Christian groups which had become trapped in ethnic and 
social ghettos. It has pushed the church out of its Western 
cultural enclave and has created, perhaps for the first time, 
a truly cross-cultural and international Christian fellow¬ 
ship. 

This century of missionary encounter with the vast 
mosaic of human cultures, social systems, ideologies, and 
religions has also made us less sure of our mission. To the 
extent that this has been a correction of our cultural 
triumphalism and naivete, it has been healthy. One sus¬ 
pects, however, that part of our uncertainty is also due to 
fatigue and a loss of vision. 

Authentic mission by its very nature entails vulnerability 
and risk. To open oneself and one s truth claims, in 
dialogue or in debate, to the many competing truth claims 
in our world can be overwhelming. It is in this encounter 
that we often become aware of how parochial our faith 
understanding is. Our involvement in mission demon- 


Earl and Ruth Zimmerman serve with Eastern Mennonite Board 
of Missions in the Philippines. Their assignment includes church 
development and teaching in the Bible Institute. 


strates to us how much our Christian faith is expressed in 
terms dictated by our culture. It reveals our compliance 
with Western colonial and imperial powers. It also places 
us at the forefront of the clash between modern and 
traditional worldviews. In this context it becomes imper¬ 
ative to reexamine our rationale for Christian mission and, 
indeed, our understanding of Christian faith. 

Contemporary evangelical understandings of “mission” 
are often informed by a rational understanding of Chris¬ 
tian faith, on the one hand, or by Pietism, on the other. 
Both Protestants and Catholics have scholastic traditions 
that emphasize rational, deductive schemes of under¬ 
standing the Christian faith. 

I recently visited a team of evangelical missionaries who 
witness to Muslims in a slum area in Manila. They have a 
reading center where they carry on lively public debates 
which often draw sizable crowds. Their innovative ap¬ 
proaches to Islam, however, appear to be limited to 
methods of rationally explaining Christianity to Muslims. 

A Filipino friend who accompanied me on that visit 
insightfully commented, “How can you win them if your 
first order of business is to challenge their religion in 
public? All you will gain is their animosity.” A serious 
limitation was their predominantly methodological, ratio¬ 
nal, and verbal approach to evangelism. The team agreed 
that an authentic local community of faith had to emerge 

11 




to significantly touch the lives of people living in that 
Manila slum. 

This is not to depreciate the contribution of the scho¬ 
lastic tradition but rather to recognize its limitations. A 
basic weakness is its failure to account for the cultural 
constraints on human understanding and systems of 
thought. This is a primary issue behind the debate on 
biblical authority in some church circles. 

Pietism is making a new impact on the church as 
evidenced by the rapidly growing Pentecostal and char¬ 
ismatic movements. Its experiential, emotional content 
meets the needs of many people seeking meaning and 
purpose in our rapidly changing technological world. 
Surely the experiential and emotional are important com¬ 
ponents of Christian faith. One must ask, however, if we 
are witnessing a retreat into a private world of religious 
experience that refuses to seriously engage the larger 
world both intellectually and morally. 

Where do we turn for answers to our questions about 
the mission of the church in the late twentieth century? 
As in every age, we return to the biblical texts with the 
questions that our involvement in the world has brought 
to us. We need to use all the tools available to us to 
understand the texts and the biblical theology behind 
them. The next step is to hermeneutically reflect on the 
biblical message, asking how we can be faithful to it in our 
situation. We must also listen carefully to the voices of 
generations of Christians that have preceded us. 

Finally, however, just as the context which shapes the 
questions of every generation is unique, so also the 
answers we give to those questions must be authentically 
our own. Our theological answers are tentative. We must 
be open to new insights as we study God s Word and are 
led by God’s Spirit in the task of mission. 

Mission in Matthew's Gospel 

The author of Matthew’s Gospel writes for a church in 
crisis. On one hand, the Matthaean community faces 
opposition from a resurgent Pharisaism following the 
destruction of Jerusalem at the hand of Titus and the 
Romans (A.D. 67-70). After the Jewish defeat and the 
destruction of the temple by the Romans, rabbinical 
Pharisaism asserted itself as the normative interpreter of 
Judaism. The relative tolerance which Christians had 
experienced as a messianic sect within Judaism was no 
longer assured. Christians were being excommunicated 
from the synagogue. They were vying with rabbinical 
Pharisaism about who would be the definitive interpreter 
of Jewish tradition. 1 

On the other hand, the success of the Matthaean 
community’s mission to the Gentiles was causing tensions 
within the church and made it difficult to dialogue with 
Judaism (Guelich 1983:26). The church was being drawn 
into uncharted waters. What did it mean to be faithful to 
the Jewish religious tradition as interpreted by the Christ 
event? Would the influx of Gentiles loose the Matthaean 
community from its spiritual moorings? What would the 
shape of continuity be and where would it be found within 
a context of radical change and discontinuity? 

The Gospel of Matthew is written as a response to this 
challenge. The response is essentially Christological. 2 It is 
the affirmation that Jesus is Messiah; he is Immanuel— 
“God with us” (Matt. 1:23). It is Jesus Messiah who fulfills 
the Law and the Prophets (Matt. 5:17). He has come 
proclaiming the eschatological kingdom of heaven (Matt. 
4:17), calling persons to leave all and follow him (Matt. 4:19). 
12 


The response also has a strong ecclesiological dimension 
(Senior 1983:67ff). Jesus Messiah has created a new 
“kingdom” community in the midst of the old communi¬ 
ties. This eschatological community is empowered 
through the resurrection presence and authority of Jesus 
Messiah (Matt. 28:18-20). It is a definitively different, 
alternative community. Kingdom persons are meek and 
poor in spirit, they mourn, they seek justice, they are 
merciful, they are pure in heart, they are peacemakers, 
and they are persecuted by the old communities (Matt. 
5:3-12). 

The ecclesiological response includes a missiological 
impulse. The community of Jesus Messiah has a universal 
mandate to make disciples of all peoples (Matt. 28:18-20). 
In its very essence it is a missionary community. It is a city 
situated on a hill which cannot be hidden (Matt. 5:14). As 
an embodied expression of the “kingdom” it is a witness 
to the world. The practical consequence, the deeds, or—to 
borrow a term from sociology—the “praxis” of this com¬ 
munity makes it a witness (Matt. 5:16). It cannot be other. 

Matthew’s objectives are both apologetic and didactic. 
He presents his community as the true Israel of God. This 
community is the definitive interpreter of the Old Testa¬ 
ment Scriptures and the Jewish tradition over against 
rabbinical Pharisaism. He also seeks to ground his large 
and mixed community, containing both Jews and a large 
influx of Gentiles, in the faith tradition of Israel. This 
tradition is interpreted through the life, death, and resur¬ 
rection of Jesus. Finally, he centers the universal mission 
impulse of his community in its faith in Jesus. To be faithful 
to the Spirit of Jesus means to be a city on a hill and to 
go into all the world. The mission to the Gentiles must go 
forward. 

Matthew’s understanding of mission grows out of his 
archetypal vision of the Christian community as the 
eschatological people of God. This new community, cen¬ 
tered in Jesus Messiah and in direct continuity with the 
prophetic vision of the people of God, is the locus where 
the “rule of God” is manifested in the world. As an 
alternative community its mission is an expression of its 
corporate life as a gathered people. It is this community 
that is a witness to the world, in both word and deed, that 
Jesus is the Messiah. 

Hermeneutical reflections 

The assertion of Christobgy 

The fundamental assertion of Matthew’s Gospel is Chris¬ 
tological. It is the claim that Jesus is the Messiah, the 
anointed one sent from God (Matt. 1:23; 3:17; 16:16). 
Matthew’s understanding of salvation, of the new escha¬ 
tological age, of the new people of God (laos theou ), and 
of mission is all premised by this assertion. We who would 
profess to follow Jesus must understand the absolute 
radicalness of this claim. 

A friend who works with a Christian service agency 
recently asked me, “How is what we are doing any 
different from the work of other nongovernmental orga¬ 
nizations that seek to meet human need?” I think we 
would all admit that on the surface there is often very 
little discernible difference. Most Christian agencies, how¬ 
ever, profess that they are serving in the name of Christ. 
What does that mean to us? 

If our vision of the “kingdom of God” is limited to the 
abstract ideals of meeting “human need” and promoting 
that which is “life giving,” can we honestly say we are 
serving in the name of Christ? I think not. Any humani- 



tarian person could affirm the same vision. What, then, 
does it mean to serve in the name of Christ? 

A Christian who is working at community organization 
among the slum dwellers in Bangkok told me that it was 
very difficult to find other Christians who were willing to 
participate in such work. Most of the people who work 
with him either have no faith commitment or are Buddhist. 
He shared, however, that the poor are not necessarily 
lovable. Persons who become involved in such work out 
of a sense of idealism rarely last long. According to him, 
it takes either a strong ideological commitment or a faith 
commitment to continue. He believes it is at this point 
that people begin to ask serious questions about faith. 

The question we are grappling with is Christological. 
Matthew’s Gospel proclaims that it is in Jesus that the 
eschatological “kingdom of God" has drawn near (Matt. 
4:17). When we serve in the name of Christ we are 
inviting those we serve to follow the same Jesus who has 
called us. There is a scandal in this because by doing so 
we are making a truth claim that is in opposition to the 
many truth claims in the world. 

The assertion of the future reign of God 
A second assertion, which is closely tied to Matthew’s 
Christology, is that the coming of Jesus was a pivotal point 
in world history. In Jesus the future reign of God—the 
eschaton—has broken into the present age (Matt. 4:12- 
17). Nevertheless, Jesus teaches us to continue to look 
forward to a future complete reign of God on earth and 
to pray in expectation, “Your kingdom come" (Matt. 6:10). 

The present age is an interim age of “already" and “not 
yet. We experience the good news of God’s reign in Jesus 
and anticipate its fullness in the age to come. This 
inbreaking of the reign of God requires a radical decision 
from us. We must now choose between the reign of God 
brought near in Jesus and the reign of the world or the 
old age. 

It is of primary importance that Christians themselves 
understand this message. Hans Kung states: 

If the Church wants to be a credible herald, witness, 
demonstrator and messenger in the service of the reign 
of God, then it must constantly repeat the message of 
Jesus not primarily to the world, to others, but to itself; 
the Church must accept in faith the message of the 
coming reign of God which has irrupted into the present, 
and constantly accept anew and in obedience the reign 
of God which is already present, God's gracious and 
demanding salvific will Its credibility—and no amount 
of energetic and busy activity can replace that vital 
factor—depends totally on its remaining faithful to the 
message of Jesus (Kung 1976:136). 

The idea that the church’s primary responsibility is to 
repeat the message of Jesus to itself may at first seem 
strange, if not completely wrong. However, our under¬ 
standing of who Jesus is, as well as our understanding of 
who we are as the new “people of God," is central to the 
task of mission. If we do not grasp and live out this message 
our many words and activities will be of little conse¬ 
quence. Our Christian service needs to grow out of the 
assurance that Jesus is the Messiah and that through him 
we are the new people of God. As we serve with this 
confidence, persons will be challenged by the Spirit to 
also make a decision for God. 

A fundamental question for Christians today is what 


Matthew’s understanding of the church as the eschatolog¬ 
ical people of God means for us. Matthew wrote from the 
conviction that in Jesus a new reality has broken into the 
world of human affairs. This new reality is the fulfillment 
of the Old Testament eschatological vision of the gathered 
end-time people of God. 

It is evident that Jesus drew his self-identity and the 
understanding of his divine mission from the literary world 
of the Old Testament. He especially identified with the 
Old Testament prophetic tradition. He based his call to 
ministry directly in that tradition (Luke 4:17-19). Mat¬ 
thew, plus all the New Testament writers, followed Jesus 
in this regard. For Matthew, the ministry of Jesus and, by 
extension, that of his community, was a fulfillment of the 
prophetic tradition. 

In this regard a basic requirement for our hermeneutical 
task is an understanding of the church as a particular, 
gathered people of God in mission. It is this continuity as 
a people of God in mission from which all our hermeneu¬ 
tical and theological reflections must flow. A hermeneutic 
which is based on a universal concept of “social respon¬ 
sibility," on one hand, or on a pietistic privatized under¬ 
standing of salvation, on the other, is not adequate. The 
problem with both is that they have lost the archetypical 
vision of what it means to be a people of God. From the 
perspective of social responsibility the kingdom has be¬ 
come synonymous with the world or certain moral and 
ethical ideals in society. From the perspective of a privat¬ 
ized spirituality the kingdom is only a hidden, internal 
experience. Both of these perspectives have lost their 
ability to offer a radical critique and a radical alternative 
to the world of human affairs. This is because they have 
no basis of discontinuity with the world from which to 
offer such a critique or alternative. 

We must be careful, however, that we do not equate 
the church with the kingdom of God. While the church 
is the locus in which the rule of God is experienced in 
our world, the kingdom is not synonymous with the 
church. The kingdom must be understood as the full 
extent of God’s will and activity. The church is not the 
kingdom but rather a foretaste of the kingdom. 

Stanley Hauerwas writes: 

... it is in the church that the narrative of God is lived 
in a way that makes the kingdom visible. The church 
must be the clear manifestation of a people who have 
learned to be at peace with themselves, one another, the 
stranger, and of course, most of all, God. There can be 
no sanctification of individuals, without a sanctified 
people. We need examples and masters, and if we are 
without either, the church cannot exist as a people who 
are pledged to be different from the world (Hauerwas 
1983:97). 

The particularity of the church’s claim to be the people 
of God is scandalous to the modern mind. It seems to 
militate against the post-Enlightenment ideals of toler¬ 
ance and universality. In one respect this critique is 
correct. By making an exclusive truth claim the church 
sets itself over against the rest of the world. This, however, 
is not the basic issue. The issue is, rather, how one relates 
the particularity of one’s existence including one’s truth 
claims to the rest of the world. 

The Western post-Enlightenment world has yet to come 
to terms with the particularity of existence and of all truth 
claims. The belief that somehow one can arrive at a 

13 



universal and value-free understanding of reality simply 
does not hold up under the scrutiny of human experience. 
The cultural imperialism which often accompanies the 
secular ideal of universality gives ample evidence of this. 
We must recognize and own the particularity which is at 
the base of all human experience and knowledge before 
we can hope to transcend its limitations. In this respect 
what is needed is recognizing and repenting of the 
triumphalism and cultural imperialism that too often char¬ 
acterizes our human existence. 

The position of the disciples in Matthew’s Gospel was 
one of vulnerability. Their position in the larger Palestin¬ 
ian society was precarious and marginal. Their truth claim 
of being the people of God sprang from their relationship 
with Jesus and their understanding of the prophetic faith 
tradition which they claimed as their own. They identified 
themselves as “poor in spirit’’ (Matt. 5:3) and freely 
acknowledged their own doubts and failures (Matt. 26:56; 
28:17). Matthew’s community which existed on the mar¬ 
gin between an often hostile Jewish world and a yet alien 
Gentile world could identify with the precariousness of 
the disciples’ existence. 

God’s people today also stand in the dialectical tension 
between faith and doubt. We struggle with the intellectual 
questions that our world brings to us. We are well aware 
of our past failures, of how shallow and arrogant our 
relationships to other peoples have been. We are often 
painfully reminded of the lack of peace and a spirit of 
reconciliation within the church. We are tempted to 
misuse power and material things. We struggle with what 
it means to be vulnerable, to be a people that identifies 
with and reaches out to social outcasts and sinners. Living 
on the boundary is often uncomfortable and we crave 
recognition and acceptance from the larger society. At 
times we are unsure of our mission and of what it means 
to go and make disciples of all the peoples (Matt. 28:19). 

We have, however, also experienced the inbreaking of 
God’s kingdom in our own lives as well as in the world in 


which we serve. We know the liberating freedom and 
peace of being God’s people. We know the joy of finding 
answers to some of our deepest questions. We have 
experienced release from the sins that warp our lives. In 
the midst of pain and suffering we have found healing. 
We believe this is because of Jesus—because his life has 
touched ours. In him we have experienced something of 
the “reign of God” and of the “age to come.” By faith we 
believe that he is with us and that all power and authority 
has been given to him. It is in this power and authority 
that we go forth (Matt. 28:20). 


Notes 

1. The struggle between Matthew’s community and 
rabbinical Pharisaism is widely acknowledged among 
scholars. On this point see Davis, The Sermon on the Mount 
(90ff.). See also Nickel, The Synoptic Gospels (115). 

2. The fact that Matthew chose the literary medium of 
a gospel demonstrates his Christological emphasis. On this 
subject see especially Kingsbury, Matthew: Structure , 
Christology, Kingdom. 

References Cited 

Davies, W. D. 

1966 The Sermon on the Mount, Cambridge: Cambridge University 
Press. 

Guelich, Robert 

1983 The Sermon on the Mount, Waco, Texas: Word Books. 
Hauerwas, Stanley 

1983 The Peaceable Kingdom , Notre Dame: University of Notre 
Dame Press. 

Kingsbury, Jack Dean 

1975 Matthew: Structure, Christology, Kingdom, Philadelphia: For¬ 

tress Press. 

Kung, Hans 

1976 The Church, New York: Image Books. 

Nickle, Keith F. 

1981 The Synoptic Gospels, Atlanta: John Knox Press. 

Senior, Donald 

1983 What Are They Saying about Matthew? New York: Paulist Press. 


14 


In Review 


Liberation Themes in Reformational Per¬ 
spective. By Samuel Escobar. Sioux Center, 
IA: Dordt Press, 1989, 63 pp., $2.95 (pb) 

Reviewed by Wilbert R. Shenk 

This booklet contains seven lectures deliv¬ 
ered at Dordt College in commemoration 
of the Protestant Reformation. Samuel Es¬ 
cobar is well known as a Latin-American 
evangelical missiologist and leader in the 
InterVarsity movement. He is now profes¬ 
sor of missiology and Latin American Stud¬ 
ies at Eastern Baptist Seminary in 
Philadelphia. 

Escobar treats the following themes: the 
Reformation and the Word of God; a dual 
movement within 19th-century Protestant¬ 
ism; reading the Bible with new eyes; the 
vision from the underside; theology as 
reflection on praxis; liberation themes in 
reformational perspective: history; and lib¬ 
eration themes in reformational perspec¬ 
tive: theology. Escobar covers consider¬ 
able ground in brief compass. The lectures 
serve as an introduction to themes impor¬ 
tant to Christians in Latin America today. 
He holds together the evangelical empha¬ 
sis on the authority of Scripture and a 
commitment to radical discipleship. He 
treats sympathetically but critically libera¬ 
tion theology. 

Escobar is a skilled communicator. At 
times he speaks almost epigrammatically as 
when he says: “The life of the Church is 
the ground of every authentic theology. 
The Church in mission is the source of the 
new questions to God’s Word that are at 
the very beginning of theology.” One 
hopes we will continue to receive from 
Samuel Escobar the fruits of his convic¬ 
tions, scholarship, and broad experience as 
a world Christian. 


Wilbert R. Shenk currently represents Men- 
nonite Board of Missions as Mennonite 
missiologist in the Gospel and Our Culture 
project in Birmingham, England. 


Sacred Word and Sacred Text: Scriptures 
in World Religions. By Harold Coward. 
Maryknoll, NY: Orbis Books, 1988, 222 pp., 
$11.95 (pb), $24.95 (hb) 

Reviewed by C. Norman Kraus 

Professor Coward of the University of Cal¬ 
gary will be recognized by many as the 
author of Pluralism: Challenge to World 
Religions (Orbis, 1985). In both volumes 
he first surveys the positions of five major 
religions—Judaism, Christianity, Islam, 
Hinduism, and Buddhism—then adds a 
chapter assessing possible future develop¬ 
ments in interreligious dialogue and points 
out a direction he feels is feasible. In 
Sacred Word and Sacred Text he adds the 
writings of Sikhism to the five religions 
surveyed. 

This second book describes the similari¬ 
ties and differences in the Scriptures of 
different religious traditions and how these 
traditions have developed internally. Cow¬ 
ard emphasizes the way in which scrip¬ 
tures are used and points out the 
significant differences between the oral 
and written traditions in each religion. His 
purpose in making this comparison is to 
provide a basis for inter religious 

dialogue. He pointed out in Pluralism that 
each religion’s ignorance of the others is 
one of the critical limitations to significant 
dialogue, and here he attempts to remedy 
this shortcoming. 

In his final chapter Coward suggests that 
future use of Scripture in the Christian 
tradition should stress the oral (evocative) 
rather than the written (analytical). He 
argues that more attention should be given 
to hearing, memorizing, and reciting Scrip¬ 
ture in personal devotion as well as public 
worship. Thus religious experience rather 
than scholarly theology would be en¬ 
hanced. 

Professor Coward’s own position is that 
we be prepared to live with a pluralism of 
Scriptures (and religions) as means of 
evoking a saving experience of the tran¬ 
scendent mystery. He urges that the way 
ahead will be greatly facilitated by an 
empathetic understanding of the sacred 
Word that has come through other reli¬ 
gions. 


C. Norman Kraus, former professor of reli¬ 
gion at Goshen College and overseas worker 
in Japan with Mennonite Board of Missions, 
is currently living in Harrisonburg, Virginia. 


Bible and Mission. Edited by Wayne 
Stumme. Minneapolis, MN: Augsburg, 
1986, 205 pp., $10.95 (pb) 

Reviewed by Ben Duerksen 

Bible and Mission consists of fourteen es¬ 
says addressing the relevance of the Bible 
to modern mission. The contributors are 
Lutheran rather than Anabaptist, as seen 
in statements like “ ‘being born anew,’ that 
birth from above, is accomplished only in 
Baptism.” 

The essays differ in style from the de¬ 
lightful, practical article by Barbara 
Jurgensen, to scholarly research which 
may be appreciated by scholars only. 

The book makes a strong case for mission 
from the Old Testament, although it fails 
to address the pre-Jewish era. The New 
Testament studies, though helpful, become 
rather technical. 

While not using the term “holistic,” the 
book warns against dichotomizing between 
evangelism and social concerns. It also 
warns against spiritualizing passages deal¬ 
ing with poverty and oppression. The 
thrust of the book is summed up well in 
the statement: “General consensus of mis¬ 
sion thinking is that God’s concern for all 
people finds special expression in God’s 
concern for the poor and oppressed peo¬ 
ple, and that a special concern of the 
church in mission must be to take sides ... 
with the poor” (p. 101). 

Although some readers might prefer a 
stronger emphasis on evangelism, the book 
provides excellent practical ideas for 
reaching international students, ethnic mi¬ 
norities, as well as urban “down-and-out- 
ers.” 


Ben Duerksen, former pastor and mission¬ 
ary, is a teacher at the Bethany Bible 
Institute in Hepburn, Saskatchewan. 


15 


EDITORIAL 


The year 1989 proved to be extraordinary. It is certain to 
stand out in the history books of the future as one of the 
pivotal moments when the world system underwent a 
basic restructuring. Astute observers had been saying for 
some time that the socialist system of government based 
on Marxist ideology was in deep difficulty, but the speed 
of its undoing was nothing short of startling. 

Since the Russian revolution of October 1917 brought 
communism to power, a series of ideological systems have 
taken charge of one country after another. These ideolo¬ 
gies have demonstrated remarkable strength of purpose, 
but they have only been able to maintain themselves in 
power by resorting to police-state tactics against their own 
citizens. Like any other system of power over time these 
ruling elites have become corrupt and alienated the 
masses. Virtually all of them have been officially hostile to 
religion or, as in the case of Nazism, co-opted religion for 
its cause. 

Twenty-five years ago it appeared we were witnessing 
the triumph of ideology. Today one is tempted to think 
that ideology is hoist with its own petard. 

Recently I read a feature story on Gian Carlo Menotti, 
who composed the opera “Amahl and the Night Visitors” 
for broadcast on television in 1951. It has become a 
standard feature of the Christmas season in North Amer¬ 
ica. The interviewer asked Menotti how he explained the 
opera s continuing appeal both to children and adults. 
Menotti pointed to several reasons. ‘In all my operas,” he 
said, ‘Tve tried to delve into the creative power of faith.” 
He insists that faith is more creative than disbelief. 
Menotti then revealed why this faith dimension is so 
important to him personally. As a child he himself was 
lame. At three years of age his nurse, a devout woman, 
took him to a religious shrine and he experienced mirac¬ 
ulous healing. He has walked normally ever since. Thus 
at a crucial point in “Amahl” the story becomes autobio¬ 
graphical for Menotti. Amahfs vicarious encounter with 
the Christ-child world reenacts Menottis meeting with 
the Christ-child through his faithful nurse. This is 


Menotti s witness to the power of faith. 

Ideology has been a strong competitor of faith in the 
twentieth century because it promised a new world order 
without dependence on the transcendent. The Christian 
faith insists that only through the intervention of God can 
the cycle of sin and all its distortions be remedied. The 
Christian witness is that by faith we are promised a new 
heaven and a new earth, not by denying this world or 
attempting to escape from it, but by entrusting ourselves 
to God who alone can redeem. 

Guy F. Hershberger died at age 93 on December 29, 
1989. In 1971 he preached a sermon, “Our Citizenship Is 
in Heaven” (published in Kingdom, Cross and Community, 
1976) in which he identified six things “the heavenly 
citizen does to hold the world together.” It is clear that 
for Hershberger “heaven” is directly concerned with the 
world, but it is a relationship of creative tension, not easy 
acquiescence. 

First, the heavenly citizen is obedient to the great 
commission. Hershberger noted that the great commission 
proclaims “the lordship of Christ over the church, over 
the angelic powers, and over their visible agents, the rulers 
of states and heads of governments.” Second, the heavenly 
citizen proclaims the lordship of Christ over the princi¬ 
palities and powers. In the third place, asserted 
Hershberger, the heavenly citizen does not have a place 
within the power structure of these principalities and 
authorities. Fourth, this is not a call for escape but rather 
martyr witness to the power of the Lamb in the face of 
hostile and destructive forces. 

Hershbergers fifth guideline is that Christian mission 
demands a full and balanced response—personal transfor¬ 
mation and social response—to the whole of human need. 
Finally, the heavenly citizen has a “keen sense of destiny” 
and lives in hope in a world that can find no hope through 
its ideologies and systems. This hopefulness is vital to the 
witness to the gospel. 

—Wilbert R. Shenk 


POSTMASTER: Send Form 3579 to Box 370, Elkhart, IN 46515. 

16 



June 1990 

Volume 18 Number 2 


MISSION U± 
FOCUS W 


Conversion and Christian Continuity 

A. F. WALLS 


The six ages of Christianity 

From Pentecost to the twentieth century, Christian history 
may be divided into six phases. Each phase sees its 
embodiment in a major culture area, which means that in 
that phase Christianity took an impress from the culture 
of that area. In each phase the expression of the Christian 
faith developed features which could only have originated 
in that culture and within that phase. 

For one brief, vital period, Christianity was entirely 
Jewish. First generation Christians were all Jews—diverse, 
perhaps, in background and outlook, Hebraist and 
Hellenist conserv ative and liberal—but without the slight¬ 
est idea that they had “changed their religion” by recog¬ 
nizing Jesus as Messiah. It remains one of the marvels of 
the ages that Christianity entered its second phase at all. 
But those unnamed “men of Cyprus and Cyrene” intro¬ 
duced some Greek-speaking pagans in Antioch to the 
Jewish national savior (Acts 11:20), and those law-righ¬ 
teous aposdes and elders at Jerusalem agreed that they 
might enter Israel without becoming Jews (Acts 15:1-29). 
The result was that Christianity became Hellenistic- 
Roman; the Messiah, Savior of Israel, was recognized to 
be also the Lord, Savior of souls. It happened just in time, 
for soon afterwards the Jewish state disappeared in the 
early holocausts of A.D. 70 and A.D. 135. Only the timely 
diffusion of faith in Jesus across cultural lines gave that 
faith any continuing place in the world. Without its 
diffusion at that time, its principal representatives would 
have been the Ebionites and similar groups who by the 
third and fourth centuries lay on the very fringe of the 
Christian movement, even if they could claim to be the 
enduring legacy of James the Just and the Jerusalem 
elders. 

In the process of transmission, the expression of that 
faith changed beyond what many an outsider might 
recognize. To see the extent of the change one has only 
to look at the utterances of early Jewish Christians as 
reflected in the New Testament, utterances which indi¬ 
cate their priorities, the matters most on their hearts. “We 
had hoped that he would be the one ... to set Israel free,” 
says the disillusioned disciple on the way to Emmaus 
(Luke 24:21, TEV). On the mount of ascension, the 
preoccupation is the same. Realizing that they stand at 

Professor A. F. Walls is director of the Centre for the Study of 
Christianity in the Non-Western World located at University of 
Edinburgh in Scotland. This paper incorporates material which 
appears in “Culture and Coherence in Christian History, ” Scottish 
Bulletin of Evangelical Theology 3(1) 1988, 1-10. 


the threshold of a new era, the disciples ask, “Lord, will 
you at this time give the kingdom back to Israel?” (Acts 
1:6). Statements and questions like these could be uttered 
only by Jews, out of centuries of present suffering and 
hope deferred. They have no meaning for those who 
belong to the nations, whether in the first or the twentieth 
century. Each comes to Jesus with quite different priori¬ 
ties, and those priorities shape the questions they ask, even 
about salvation. A first-century Levantine Gentile would 
never have brought to Jesus as a matter of urgency the 
question of the political destiny of Israel, though he might 
have asked about the destiny of the soul. 

Those Christian Jews in Antioch who realized that Jesus 
had something to say to their pagan friends took an 
immense risk. They were prepared to drop the time-hon¬ 
ored word “Messiah,” knowing that it would mean little 
to their neighbors and perhaps mislead them—what con¬ 
cern was the redeemer of Israel, should they grasp the 
concept, to them? They were prepared to see the title of 
their national savior, the fulfillment of the dearest hopes 
of their people, become attached to the name of Jesus as 
though it was a sort of surname. They took up the 
ambiguous and easily misunderstood word “Lord” (Acts 
11:20; cf. Acts 9:22, which relates to a Jewish audience). 
They could not have foreseen where their action would 
lead, and it would be surprising if someone did not warn 
them about the disturbing possibilities of confusion and 
syncretism. But it transformed Christianity. 

The second age of Christianity 

The second of the six phases of Christianity was 
Hellenistic-Roman. This is not to say that within that age 
Christianity was geographically confined to the area 
where Hellenistic-Roman culture was dominant. Impor¬ 
tant Christian communities lay, for instance, in Central 
Asia, East Africa, and South India. But the dominant 
expression of the Christian faith for several centuries 
resulted from its steady penetration of Hellenistic thought 
and culture during a period when that culture was also 
associated with a single political entity, the Roman Em¬ 
pire. 

The second phase has, like the first, left its mark on all 
later Christianity. Of the new religious ideas which en¬ 
tered with the Christian penetration of Hellenistic culture, 
one of the most permeative for the future was that of 
orthodoxy, a canon of right belief, capable of being stated 
in a series of propositions arrived at by a process of logical 
argument. Such a feature was not likely to mark Christi¬ 
anity in its Jewish period; Jewish identity has always been 

17 




concerned either with what a person is or with what he 
does rather than with what he believes. But when Christian 
faith began to penetrate the Hellenistic-Roman world, it 
encountered a total system of thought, a system to which 
it was in some respects antipathetic, but which, once 
encountered, had to be permeated. The system had a 
certain built-in arrogance, a feature it has never quite lost 
despite the mutations through which the Hellenistic- 
Roman legacy has gone in its transmission over the 
centuries to other peoples, and despite the penetration 
effected by Christian faith. Basically it maintained that 
there is one desirable pattern of life, a single “civilization” 
in effect, one model of society, one body of law, one 
universe of ideas. Accordingly, there are in essence two 
types of humanity: people who share that pattern and 
those ideas, and people who do not. There are Greeks—a 
cultural, not an ethnic, term—and there are barbarians. 
There are civilized people who share a common heritage, 
and there are savages, who do not. 

In many ways the Jews and their religion already 
represented a challenge to this assumption. Whatever 
degree of assimilation to it many Jews might reflect, the 
stubborn fact of Jewish identity put them in a different 
category from the rest of the Hellenistic-Roman universe. 
Alone in that universe they had an alternative literature, 
a written tradition, of comparable antiquity. And they had 
their own dual classification of mankind: Israel —the na¬ 
tion—and the nations. Hellenistic-Roman Christians had 
no option but to maintain, and to seek to reconcile, aspects 
of both their inheritances. 

The total Hellenistic-Roman system of thought had to 
be penetrated and Christianized by the gospel. This meant 
the endeavor to bring the intellectual tradition into cap¬ 
tivity to Christ and to use it for new purposes; it also meant 
putting the traditions of codification and of organization 
to the service of the gospel. The result was orthodoxy, a 
logically expounded belief set in codified form, estab¬ 
lished through a process of consultation and maintained 
through effective organization. Hellenistic-Roman civili¬ 
zation offered a total system of thought and expected 
general conformity to its norms. The Christian penetration 
of the system inevitably left it a total system. 

The third age—barbarian Christianity 

Hellenistic-Roman civilization lived for centuries in the 
shadow of fear; fear of the day when the center could not 
hold, when things fell apart, when the over-extended 
frontiers collapsed and the barbarian hordes poured in. 
Christians fully shared these fears. Tertullian, who lived 
in the age of persecution, though he would not counte¬ 
nance Christians in the army—Christ has unbelted every 
soldier, he says—prayed for the preservation of the em¬ 
pire; for when the frontiers collapsed, the great tribulation 
would begin. For people living under the Christian empire 
the triumph of the barbarians would be equated with the 
end of Christian civilization. 

Two great events brought about the end of Hellenistic- 
Roman Christianity. One had been widely predicted—the 
collapse of the Western Roman Empire before the bar¬ 
barians. The other no one could have predicted—the 
emergence of the Arabs as a world power and their 
occupation of the Eastern provinces where the oldest and 
strongest Christian churches lay. The combination of 
these forces led to the end of the Hellenistic-Roman phase 
of Christianity. That it did not lead to the slow strangula- 
18 


tion of the total Christian presence in the world was due 
to the slow, painful, and far from satisfactory spread of 
Christian allegiance among the tribal peoples beyond the 
old frontiers, the people known as barbarians, the destroy¬ 
ers of Christian civilization. What, in fact, happened was 
the development of a third phase of Christianity, what we 
may call a barbarian phase. Once again, it was just in time: 
centuries of erosion and attrition faced the peoples of 
Christianity’s Hellenistic heartlands. Once again, Christi¬ 
anity had been saved by its cross-cultural diffusion. 

The culture gap to be bridged was quite as great as that 
between Jew and Greek, yet the former faith of classical 
civilization became the religion of peasant cultivators. The 
process was marked by the more or less ready acceptance 
by new Christians of a great deal of the cultural inheri¬ 
tance belonging to the classical civilization from which 
they derived their Christianity. Further, when they sub¬ 
stituted the God of the Bible for their traditional panthe¬ 
ons, the language and ideas had passed through a 
Greek-Roman filter before it reached them. The signifi- 


June 1990 Volume 18 Number 2 

MISSION [7* 

FOCUS W 


17 Conversion and Christian Continuity 
A. F. Walls 

21 Sixteenth Century Insights and Contemporary 
Reality: Reflections on Thirty-Five Years in 
Mission 

Robert Ramseyer 

23 Anabaptism and Ecclesiology in a Context of 
Plurality 

Stanley W. Green 

25 How My Understanding of Mission Has Developed 
Milka Rindzinski 

27 In review 
32 Editorial 


EDITORIAL COUNCIL 
Editor Wilbert R. Shenk 

Review editors Hans Kasdorf, Henry J. Schmidt 
Other members Peter M. Hamm, Robert L. Ramseyer 

Editorial assistant Betty Kelsey 


MISSION FOCUS (ISSN 0164-4696) is published quarterly at 500 
S. Main St., Elkhart, Indiana, by Mennonite Board of Missions. 
Single copies available without charge. Send correspondence to 
Box 370, Elkhart, IN 46515-0370. Second-class postage paid at 
Elkhart, Indiana, and at additional mailing offices. Lithographed in 
USA. Copyright 1990 by Mennonite Board of Missions. 
POSTMASTER: Send address changes to MISSION FOCUS, Box 
370, Elkhart, IN 46515-0370. 


cance of this we must consider later. 

Nevertheless, the barbarian phase was emphatically not 
a simple extension of the Christianity of the patristic age; 
it was a new creation, conditioned less by city-based 
literary, intellectual, and technological tradition than by 
the circumstances of peasant cultivators and their harsh, 
uncertain lives. If the barbarians took their ideas from the 
Hellenistic Christian world, they took their attitudes from 
the primal world; and both ideas and attitudes are com¬ 
ponents in the complex which makes up a people s 
religion. As with their predecessors, they appropriated the 
Christian faith for themselves, and reformulated it with 
effects which continued amid their successors after their 
own phase had passed away. If the second phase of 
Christianity invented the idea of orthodoxy, the third 
invented the idea of the Christian nation. Christian Roman 
emperors might establish the church, might punish here¬ 
tics, might make laws claiming allegiance to Christ, might 
claim to represent Christ, but tribal peoples knew a far 
stronger law than any emperor could enforce—that of 
custom. Custom is binding upon every child born into a 
primal community; nonconformity to that custom is simply 
unthinkable. A communal decision to adopt the Christian 
faith might take some time in coming; there might be 
uncertainty, division, and debate, but once thoroughly 
made, the decision would bind everyone in that society. 
A community must have a single custom. It was not 
necessarily a case of strong rulers enforcing their own 
choice. In Iceland, which was a democracy with no central 
ruler, the Assembly was divided down the middle between 
Christians and non-Christians. When the decision for 
Christianity was eventually made, the non-Christians felt 
bitter and betrayed, but no one suggested a division into 
communities with different religions. Religion, in fact, is 
but one aspect of the custom which binds a society 
together. There can be only one church in a community. 
And so barbarian Christianity brings to fruition the idea 
of the Christian nation. 

Once the idea of the Christian nation was established, 
a new hermeneutic habit easily developed; the parallel 
between the Christian nation and Israel. Once nation and 
church are coterminous in scope, the experiences of the 
nation can be interpreted in terms of the history of Israel. 
In Western Christianity, this habit has long outlived the 
historical circumstances which gave it birth and has 
continued into the age of pluralism and secularization. 

The fourth and fifth ages of Christianity 

The fourth cultural phase of Christianity was a natural 
development of the third. Interaction between Christian 
faith and practice in its Hellenistic-Roman form and the 
culture of the northern peoples produced a remarkably 
coherent system across Western and Central Europe. 
When the Eastern Roman Empire, which effectively 
prolonged the Hellenistic phase of Christianity for several 
centuries in one area of the world, finally collapsed before 
the Muslims, this new hybrid Western form of Christianity 
became the dominant representation of Christianity. In 
the sixteenth century this Western formulation was to 
undergo radical revision through the movements of Ref¬ 
ormation. The Protestant version of this was particularly 
radical, not least—through its emphasis on vernacular 
Scriptures—in stressing the local encounter of man with 
the Word of God. Reforming Catholicism, on the other 
hand, stressed the universal nature of the church, but 


unconsciously established its universality on the basis of 
features which belonged essentially to Western intellec¬ 
tual and social history—and largely to a particular period 
of it. Both forms, however, belonged unmistakably to 
Western Europe; their very differences marked a growing 
cultural divergence between the north and south of the 
area. 

One major development that took place within the West 
over those centuries set a challenge to Christian faith as 
hitherto received in Europe and required its reformula¬ 
tion. As we have seen, a necessary feature of barbarian 
Christianity was communal decision and mass response. 
But Western thought developed a particular conscious¬ 
ness of the individual as a monad, independent of kin-re¬ 
lated identity. Christianity in its Western form adapted to 
this developing consciousness, until the concept of Chris¬ 
tian faith as a matter of individual decision and individual 
application became one of the hallmarks of Western 
Christianity. 

This Western phase of Christianity developed into 
another, with which it should probably be taken: the age 
of expanding Europe. The population of Europe was 
exported to other continents and the dominance of Eu¬ 
rope extended, until by the twentieth century people of 
European origin occupied, possessed, or dominated the 
greater part of the globe. During this vital period, Chris¬ 
tianity was the professed and, to a considerable extent, 
the active religion of almost all the European peoples. 

Seen in the context of Christian history as a whole, this 
period saw two remarkable developments. One was a 
substantial recession of European peoples from the Chris¬ 
tian faith. Its significance was not at first manifest because 
it was not regular and steady. Beginning in the sixteenth 
century, it had reached notable proportions by the eigh¬ 
teenth, when it appeared as if Christianity might still claim 
the masses of Europe but was losing the intellectuals. In 
the eighteenth century, however, and for much of the 
nineteenth, there was a Christian counterattack, which 
halted the movement of recession in Europe and brought 
spectacular accessions in the new towns of North America. 
The sudden quickening of the recession, therefore, in the 
twentieth century took observers by surprise—though 
predictions of its extent had been generally accepted a 
couple of centuries earlier. Only in the twentieth century 
did it become clear that the great towns, which were the 
source and the sign of Europe’s dominance, had never 
really been evangelized at all. 

The other major development of the period was the 
cross-cultural transplantation of Christianity, with varying 
degrees of success, to multitudes of people outside Eu¬ 
rope. It did not look overwhelming by 1920; the high 
hopes, once entertained, of the evangelization of the 
world in one generation had by that time drained away 
into the trenches of the First World War. But we can see 
now that it was enough. The seeds of Christian faith had 
been planted in the Southern continents; before long 
these seeds were fruiting abundantly. All the world em¬ 
pires, except the Russian, have now passed away; the 
European hegemony of the world is broken; the recession 
of Christianity among the European peoples appears to 
be continuing. And yet we seem to stand at the threshold 
of a new age of Christianity, one in which its main base 
will be in the Southern continents, and where its dominant 
expression will be filtered through the culture of those 
continents. Once again, Christianity has been saved for 
the world by its diffusion across cultural lines. 


19 



Christian expansion and the sixth age of Christianity 

Let us pause here to consider the peculiar history of 
Christianity, as compared with other faiths. Hindus say 
with some justice that they represent the world s earliest 
faith, for many things in Indian religion are the same now 
as they were before Israel came out of Egypt. Yet over all 
those centuries, the geographical and cultural center has 
been the same. Invaders like the Aryans have come and 
made their mark; great innovative movements like that of 
the Buddha have come, flourished awhile, and then passed 
on elsewhere. The Christians and the Muslims with their 
claims to universal allegiance have come and made their 
converts. But still the same faith remains in the same place, 
absorbing all sorts of influences from without, not being 
itself absorbed by any. 

By contrast, Iranian religion has been vital enough to 
have a molding effect at certain crucial times on 
Hinduism, Judaism, Christianity, and Islam in succession; 
and yet, as a separate, identifiable phenomenon in the 
world, its presence today is tiny. Christianity, on the other 
hand, has throughout its history spread outwards, across 
cultural frontiers, so that each new point on the Christian 
circumference is a new potential Christian center. And 
the very survival of Christianity as a separate faith has 
evidently been linked to the process of cross-cultural 
transmission. Indeed, with hindsight, we can see that on 
several occasions this transmission took place just in time; 
that without it, the Christian faith must surely have 
withered away. Nor has its progress been steadily outward, 
as Muslims may claim of their faith. Its progress has been 
serial, with a principal presence in different parts of the 
world at different times. 

Each phase of Christian history has seen a transforma¬ 
tion of Christianity as it has entered and penetrated 
another culture. There is no such thing as “Christian 
culture” or “Christian civilization” in the sense that there 
is an Islamic culture and an Islamic civilization. There 
have been several different Christian civilizations already; 
there may yet be many more. The reason for this lies in 
the infinite translatability of the Christian faith. Islam, the 
only other faith hitherto to make a comparable impact in 
such global terms, can produce a simple, recognizable 
culture—recognizable despite local assimilations and vari¬ 
ations—across its huge geographical spread. This surely 
has something to do with the ultimate untranslatability of 
its charter document, the Koran. The Christian Scriptures, 
by contrast, are open to translation; nay, the great act on 
which Christian faith rests, the Word becoming flesh and 
pitching tent among us, is itself an act of translation. And 
this principle brings Christ to the heart of each culture, 
to the points of reference within it by which men know 
themselves. That is why each phase of Christian history 
has produced new themes; themes which the points of 
reference of that culture have made inescapable for those 
who share that framework. The same themes may lie 
beyond the conception of Christians of an earlier or 
another framework of thought. They will have their own 
commanding heights to be conquered by Christ. 

Diversity and coherence in historic Christianity 

If we were to take samples of representative Christians 
from every century from the first to the twentieth, moving 
from place to place as will be necessary if our choice is to 
be representative, would they have anything in common? 
Certainly such a collection of people would often have 

20 


quite different priorities in the expression of the faith. And 
it is not only that the priorities are different; what appears 
of utmost importance to one group may appear intolerable, 
even blasphemous, to another. Even were we to take only 
those acknowledged as forming the tradition of Christian¬ 
ity represented by Western Evangelicals—how does the 
expression of faith compare among temple-worshipping 
Jew, Greek Council father, Celtic monk, German Re¬ 
former, English Puritan, Victorian churchman? How de¬ 
fective would each think the other on matters vital to 
religion? 

And yet I believe we can discern a firm coherence 
underlying all these and, indeed, the whole of historic 
Christianity. It is not easy to state this coherence in 
propositional, still less in credal form—for extended credal 
formulation is itself a necessary product of a particular 
Christian culture. But a small body of convictions and 
responses express themselves when Christians of any 
culture express their faith. These may perhaps be stated 
thus: 

1. The worship of the God of Israel. This not only defines 
the nature of God; the One, the Creator and the Judge, 
the One who does right and before whom man falls down; 
it makes the historical particularity of Christian faith. And 
it links the Christian—usually a Gentile—with the history 
of a people quite different from his own. It gives him a 
point of reference outside himself and his society. 

2. The ultimate significance of Jesus of Nazareth. This is 
perhaps the test which above all marks off historic Chris¬ 
tianity from the various movements along its fringes, as 
well as from other world faiths which accord recognition 
to the Christ. Once again, it would be pointless to try to 
encapsulate this ultimacy forever in any one credal for¬ 
mula. Any such formula will be superseded; or, even if 
adopted for traditional reasons, it may make no impression 
on believers who do not have the conceptual vocabulary 
the formula will imply. Each culture has its ultimate; and 
Christ is the ultimate in everyone’s vocabulary. 

3. That God is active where believers are. 

4. That believers constitute a people of God transcending 
time and space. 

These convictions appear to underlie the whole Chris¬ 
tian tradition across the centuries, in all its diversity. Some 
of the very diversity of Christian expression has itself 
arisen from the need to set forth these responses in terms 
of the believers’ framework of thought and perception of 
the world. To them we should perhaps add a small body 
of institutions which have continued from century to 
century. The most obvious of these have been the reading 
of a common body of Scriptures and the special use of 
bread and wine and water. 

Southern culture and the Christian future 

Once more the Christian faith is penetrating new cul¬ 
tures—those of Africa and the Pacific and parts of Asia. 
(The Latin American situation is too complex for us to 
consider its peculiar significance here.) The present indi¬ 
cations are that these Southern expressions of Christianity 
are becoming the dominant forms of the faith. 

This is likely to mean the appearance of new themes 
and priorities undreamed of by ourselves or by earlier 
Christian ages; for it is the mark of Christian faith that it 
must bring Christ to the big issues closest to men’s hearts. 
It does so through the structures by which people perceive 
and recognize their world; these are not universally the 
same. Affirmations which have been keynotes for Chris- 



tians of former ages—or for ourselves—often represent 
the application of the Word about Christ to some great 
issue of assumption within the culture of time. For Chris¬ 
tians of another time and place, with different cultural 
issues and assumptions, the notes may sound faint or 
strange. But there will certainly be themes and assump¬ 
tions within their cultures which await the Word about 
Christ; and as the word is applied, new Christian keynotes 
may be heard. Southern Christianity may not possess those 
points of reference which made orthodoxy, for instance, 
or the Christian nation, or the primacy of individual 
decision, absolutely crucial to the capture by Christ of 
older worldviews. Pious early Jewish Christians would 


have found their Greek successors strangely cold about 
Israel s most precious possession, the Law of God and its 
guide to living. Many of them would have been equally 
disturbed by the intellectual complexities into which 
Christological discussion was leading Greek Christians. In 
each case what was happening was the working out of 
Christian faith within accepted views of the world, so that 
those worldviews—as with the conversion of believers— 
are transformed, yet recognizable. Conversion is not sim¬ 
ply a personal matter; when applied to attitudes and 
priorities, relationships, and ways of thinking, it takes 
generations. 


Sixteenth-Century Insights and Contemporary Reality: 

Reflections on Thirty-Five Years in Mission 

ROBERT RAMSEYER 


Three characteristics of the sixteenth-century Anabaptist 
movement have special relevance for Christians con¬ 
cerned about the mission of the church near the close of 
the twentieth century. These are: 

1. A rejection of creeds and formal systematic theologiz¬ 
ing in favor of reliance simply on the New Testament 
for guidance; 

2. The recognition that all Christians are called to be 
disciples involved in the mission of sharing the gospel; 

3. The understanding that the church exists for sharing 
the gospel. 


Theology 

The Anabaptists had nothing that would pass for theology 
in most scholarly circles and their descendants have 
shown little interest in systematic theology. I can remem¬ 
ber feeling somewhat inferior as a seminary student in the 
early 1950s because Mennonites did not seem to have 
written important works in theology. But is this really 
something to be embarrassed about? Does lack of interest 
in systematic theology necessarily imply lack of thoughtful 
reflection on the Christian faith and what it means to be 
a Christian? 

In mission today, “contextualization” looms large. The 
process of contextualization involves going back to the 
starting point, and for the Anabaptists the starting point 
was Jesus Christ as he is seen in the Scriptures. The 
Anabaptists took the Scriptures as their guide and looked 
there for contemporary guidance. They were con¬ 
textualizing, looking for guidance for living as Christian 
disciples in their contemporary setting. Christians contex¬ 
tualize in order to be able to live as Christians where they 
are. This is also what theology ought to be all about. That 

Robert and Alice Ruth Ramseyer are overseas workers with the 
General Conference Mennonite Church Commission on Overseas 
Mission. This article is a revision of a paper presented in Japanese 
to the Anabaptist Seminar sponsored by the Japan Mennonite 
Fellowship in Shimonoseki, Japan , in November 1988. The original 
title was “Saisenreiha no Isan to Konnichi no Fukuin Senkyo (The 
Anabaptist Legacy and Mission Today).” 


is, the real purpose of theology is not to provide a 
comprehensive system for answering all possible questions 
about God, but rather to provide a map for Christian living. 
If theology is a map, obviously it needs to be redone for 
every time and place, for each situation. Moreover, a map 
need not include everything but only those things which 
people need to know in order to find their way. 

Theology as a map has basically two purposes: (1) The 
church needs maps to help it share the good news about 
Jesus Christ with people who do not yet know him. It 
needs maps to guide that sharing so that people can see 
that the good news really is good news for them. These 
maps have to respond to people who are not yet con¬ 
sciously following Jesus Christ, respond to them in the real 
world in which they live. (2) Maps are also important to 
help us live as Jesus’ disciples and to enable the church 
to be the church in today’s world. We need maps to guide 
us in our lives as individual disciples and to help the 
church see its role in society today, maps which are 
specifically focused on the concrete situations in which 
we live and work. 

Map-type theology, contextualized theology, whether it 
be for sharing the good news with people who are not yet 
disciples or for guiding disciples in their daily lives, 
focuses on the actual situations in which people live. It 
follows then that, when the church goes out in mission, it 
is important not to go out with prepackaged theological 
statements, but to go out with the Bible and to sit down 
with Christians where they are to work out appropriate 
expressions of the Christian faith for that time and place. 
For this reason we can be grateful that the Anabaptists 
were not theologians in the traditional sense, theologians 
who tried to work out statements which would be valid 
for all times and places. 

Obviously no one goes into mission with no precon¬ 
ceived ideas about the Christian faith and life. No one 
goes with “only the Bible.’’ We go with understandings 
which reflect our own histories and situations. However, 
in mission we are called to consciously work at refocusing, 
to work on the development of new maps which can guide 
people in this new (to us) setting. In mission this work of 

21 



refocusing begins when people sit down and read the New 
Testament together, asking what this means for people in 
their communities where they live. Obviously, the use of 
imported theological statements impedes that refocusing 
task. 

No matter where they may be, Christians will always be 
pilgrims and strangers, never able to fully blend with the 
society around them. However, we need to be sure that 
we are strangers for the right reasons, strangers because 
we follow Jesus, not because we follow some theology 
imported from another time and place. Following an 
imported theology is like using a London map to find a 
house in Tokyo, or like using a sixteenth century map of 
Hiroshima to find a home there today. It simply will not 
work. Jesus is our guide, and theology is to help us follow 
him. It has no other reason for existence. 

The Christian church in Japan is not at home in the 
society around it, and it should not be. However, we need 
to be sure that the strangeness of the church comes from 
following Jesus Christ and not from following a theology 
brought by missionaries. The church in Japan today is a 
church of strangers and pilgrims—strangers and pilgrims 
because it has studied the Bible and listened to the voice 
of Jesus from the midst of Japanese society. Where are 
the theological maps of the Mennonite and Brethren in 
Christ churches in Japan today actually focused? Have 
Mennonite and Brethren in Christ Christians been free 
to refocus the theologies which the first missionaries 
brought from North America? Is our so-called Anabaptist 
theology actually only a twentieth-century systemization 
of sixteenth-century ideas and practices? Is our so-called 
evangelical theology focused on our situation today or is 
it still focused on nineteenth- and twentieth-century 
North America? 

Our task today is to go back once again to the beginning, 
back to the good news about Jesus, and to ask what this 
means for the world in which we live today. Going back 
to the beginning does not mean ignoring two thousand 
years of Christian theologizing; there is a great deal that 
we can learn from that history. Rather, we are called to 
return to the beginning in the light of that history. 

The issue for the church in Japan, and in the rest of the 
world, is whether we have the courage to do that or 
whether we will remain captives of theological maps 
prepared for other times and places. This will require 
courage, but without it the church’s mission of gospel 
sharing cannot be carried out in Japan or anywhere else. 
It is this courage which is part of the legacy of those 
sixteenth-century Anabaptists. 

Disciples 

When the Anabaptists shared the gospel, their objective 
was not gaining passive converts, but making active 
disciples of Jesus Christ, disciples who themselves would 
live to share the gospel with others. Those sixteenth-cen¬ 
tury Christians took Matthew 28:18-20 seriously, believing 
that this was what Jesus had called them to do. They 
believed that all Christians in all times and places are 
called to make disciples. 

Today the term “disciple” is often misunderstood as 
meaning a special class of superior Christians. There are 
ordinary Christians and there are disciples. However, 
“disciple” simply means one who is learning, learning from 
a teacher to whom one is committed. Jesus’ disciples are 
those who are committed to learning from him, people 
who want to live in his way. Disciples believe that the way 
22 


Jesus taught us to live is not an impossible ideal but a way 
that is both possible and desirable. 

Discipleship often becomes confusingly involved in the 
traditional Protestant argument about faith and works. 
That is, when discipleship is stressed there are those who 
say, “You are trying to earn your salvation through good 
works.” This reaction indicates a profound lack of under¬ 
standing of what faith is. Unfortunately, many of those 
who think of themselves as spiritual descendants of the 
Anabaptists have been led into this misunderstanding. 
Faith is our link with God, our tie of conscious depen¬ 
dence on God. In faith we admit that Jesus Christ knows 
far better than we what is good for us and what is harmful. 
Discipleship, trying to walk in the way that Jesus showed 
and taught, is simply the result of the fact that we believe 
walking in the way Jesus showed and taught really is the 
best way for us to live. Faith is our tie to Jesus Christ, and 
the way that we live in discipleship is the concrete 
expression of that faith. 

If we are disciples we share in the commission that Jesus 
gave to his disciples: As the Father sent me, so I send you 
(John 20:21). Our mission is the same as Jesus’ mission, 
and he is our model for that mission. Jesus is also our model 
for how the gospel is to be shared. Jesus teaches us the 
ways, the methods, by which the good news is to be shared. 

One of the most important issues in mission today is the 
issue of priorities. A great deal has been written about the 
relative priority of (1) evangelism; (2) helping people with 
physical needs; and (3) working for the freeing of the 
oppressed. Jesus, however, responded to the needs of the 
people in whose presence he ministered without setting 
arbitrary priorities. He helped people where they needed 
help without apparent reference to where this stood on a 
list of ultimate priorities. Or perhaps it would be more 
accurate to say that for Jesus, helping people where they 
needed help was always the number one priority. If we 
are Jesus’ disciples, then he is our example in this as well. 

Communication studies have shown that the way a 
message is communicated has a profound effect on how 
that message will be understood. In Jesus’ case, as the 
incarnate Word of God, there was complete unity be¬ 
tween the good news which was shared, the sharer of that 
good news, and the way that it was shared. This is the 
example toward which we strive. Jesus’ way of sharing the 
gospel was no accident but the way demanded by the 
content of the good news itself. In sharing the good news, 
Jesus rejected all claims to what is usually called power 
in human society. He rejected social power, economic 
power, technological power, and the power that comes 
with education. Instead, he became a servant and built 
relationships of love from that position, relationships along 
with which the good news could be shared. 

What about the church in Japan? Too often we early 
Mennonite and Brethren in Christ missionaries in Japan 
had the traditional Protestant understanding that disciples 
are a special class of extra-mature Christians and that 
discipleship is too much to ask of new Christians. First 
new Christians receive Jesus in their hearts and then, as 
they are taught more, they may become ready to become 
disciples. The result can be seen in the development and 
growth of Mennonite and Brethren in Christ churches in 
Japan. In the beginning many people confessed their faith 
in Jesus and joined the church. At the same time many 
new Christians left the church. They had joined an 
interesting new religion for a time but had not made a 
commitment to becoming lifelong disciples of Jesus Christ. 


Even today many church members consider Jesus’ way 
one religion among others, a way which gives comfort and 
encouragement to the individual, but they have never 
understood it as a radically transforming, lifelong commit¬ 
ment. In too many cases our evangelism has been based 
on a traditional Protestant, rather than an Anabaptist, 
understanding of the gospel. The present plateauing of 
growth in the church in Japan is a direct result. 

Can we move from passive believers to disciples, aggres¬ 
sively engaged in mission? Once again this will take 
courage, and there will be those who leave the church in 
the process. 

The church 

What about the church which exists for mission? The 
sixteenth-century Anabaptists tried to re-create in their 
century the church which they saw in the New Testament. 
Obviously there is no single model for the church in the 
New Testament. However, although there are several 
models, one thing is clear. The New Testament church 
was not simply one social organization among others. The 
church in the New Testament was more like family, 
community, a living, vital organism. The church really is 
the living, active body of Christ. In the midst of sixteenth- 
century European society, the Anabaptists recovered this 
vision of the church and worked at building a church 
bound together by love in which members really tried to 
help each other, a church in which all were brothers and 
sisters without hierarchical distinctions. 

That church actively engaged in mission. It was orga¬ 
nized for mission. A church which was not interested in 
sharing the good news would have been inconceivable to 
those first Anabaptists. The loving fellowship of the church 
was attractive to people outside the church and drew them 
in. The fellowship of the church was living testimony to 
the good news, the concrete expression of the gospel. For 
both the New Testament church and the Anabaptists, 
evangelism was never a matter of words only; the witness 


of the gospel was a witness which could be seen and 
experienced. In the church the gospel was made concrete. 

When Mennonite and Brethren in Christ missionaries 
first came to Japan they organized themselves as missions. 
Probably the principal reason was that missionaries had 
done this wherever they went around the world. This was, 
of course, an organization separate from the church which 
was planted. It was natural, then, that church and mission 
came to be seen as organizations with different purposes, 
and since this “mission’’ was an organization of missionar¬ 
ies its purpose was clearly mission. The purpose of the 
church then necessarily lay elsewhere. 

In addition, since the church in Japan was perceived to 
be a religious organization, its position in the lives of 
Christians was limited to what was understood to be the 
religious dimension of life. This has meant that in the lives 
of many church members there are things more important 
than the church, and that in some cases when a problem 
arises in a member’s life, the member has chosen to leave 
the church. 

However, in spite of all the mistakes and misunderstand¬ 
ings and, in a very real sense, because of these mistakes 
and misunderstandings, there are living, active Mennonite 
and Brethren in Christ congregations in Japan today. 
There are dedicated, committed disciples of Jesus Christ 
in these congregations. God’s love is apparent in the 
fellowship of these churches, and the gospel of Jesus 
Christ is concretely visible. 

In Japan, as around the world, we are called to study 
the experience of the church, to learn from that experi¬ 
ence, and to go forward in faith. The Anabaptist legacy 
lies in the faith and knowledge that no matter where we 
are, no matter how difficult our circumstances may be, it 
is possible to live as disciples of Jesus Christ carrying on 
his mission in the world. 

Jesus’ disciples can be found in Japan and around the 
world. The church which is his group of disciples is here. 
We can look forward in faith to the growth of his church. 


Anabaptism and Ecclesiology in a Context of Plurality 

STANLEY W. GREEN 


We live at a significant juncture in the history of the 
world—the final decade before the millennium. All 
around the world events occur at a dizzying pace, spurred, 
no doubt, by technological advancements. These changes, 
the technological advances, and the portentous signifi¬ 
cance of the advancing new millennium have given new 
impetus to the church’s missionary calling. Strategies for 
reaching the lost and unchurched by A.D. 2000 multiply 
at a bewildering rate. Alongside other denominational 
plans, the Mennonite Church has its Vision 95 goals and 
the General Conference Mennonites have their Kingdom 
Commitments. 

The massive migration of people to the cities, often 
across national, cultural, and ethnic boundaries, makes the 
city a mosaic of human diversity. We celebrate the 

Stanley W. Green is pastor of Faith Mennonite Church , Vice-Pres¬ 
ident of the Council of Anabaptists in Los Angeles , and a PhD. 
student at Fuller Theological Seminary. 


opportunity this presents for reaching people who live on 
our doorstep with the gospel. This same fortuitous circum¬ 
stance, which we believe is providential in the purposes 
of God, also brings certain tensions. A chief tension is 
associated with our evangelistic concern to expand the 
church and our desire to be faithful to the church’s 
reconciling character—which is no less evangelistic, even 
if not immediately apparent. It is important to affirm early 
on that the church has a mandate to grow. 

Growth is vital for the health and well-being of the 
church. The earliest fruit of the Spirit’s ministry in the 
church was evidenced by its phenomenal growth. The first 
historical records of the Christian church celebrate the 
rapid growth of the apostolic church. It seems important, 
even imperative, as faithful and responsible stewards that 
we identify the most effective means to reach the multi¬ 
tudes who are part of the great harvest still to be reaped, 
according to the desire of the Savior (Matt. 9:37-38). 


23 



In recent years, many of those who are enthusiastic 
about our evangelistic imperative and who try sincerely 
to be faithful to the church’s commission to “disciple the 
nations” (Matt. 28:19) have espoused what is known as 
the “homogeneous unit” or “people group” approach. 
Though the intense debate regarding this approach has 
died down, there continues to be a quiet implementation 
of homogeneous groupings with tragic consequence for 
church and society. 

To be sure, there are many positive and valuable features 
to this particular approach. It affirms the value of cultural 
distinctives. It posits that a convert should not be expected 
to renounce or alienate himself from his cultural heritage. 
It asserts correctly that to ignore a people’s language, 
culture, traditions, and identity as if these were valueless 
or nonexistent is wrong. In the same vein it suggests that 
the gospel’s progress is facilitated by moving along natural 
human lines. Unfortunately, the consequence of this 
approach is that churches tend to be comprised of a single 
ethnic, linguistic, cultural group. This should not be the 
case in the long run. In time the church must recognize 
that its true nature is to reflect the new reality of the 
kingdom where all natural and human barriers are demol¬ 
ished. This reality will come in time through the process 
of nurture. It is important not to place any obstacles in 
the way of persons coming to Christ in order to facilitate 
the numerical growth of the church. 

While we as Anabaptists must be equally enthusiastic 
about the numerical growth of the church and our desire 
to be faithful to the calling entrusted to us, we need to 
affirm certain considerations which we feel are indispens¬ 
able to the integrity of the church. 

Pragmatism and methods 

For Anabaptists, pragmatism has never been an important 
part of our heritage. If it were, we would never have the 
legacy of martyrdom as witnessed to in the Martyrs Mirror. 
For Anabaptists the end has never justified the means. 
Scripture has always been the locus for our appeal to 
authority. It is here, in God’s will as revealed in the 
authoritative Word, that we find our ultimate and only 
justification for the methods we use in reaching the world. 
Pragmatism suggests the usability of a particular strategy 
as long as, and especially if, it works well. The difficulty 
with this approach is that the church is often seen as an 
end in itself. Against that unwarranted perception, the 
Scripture witnesses that we are not called to preach the 
church but to announce the kingdom of God, a central 
motif and a pervasive preoccupation of Jesus’ teaching 
and ministry. In fact, it is the first word from Jesus’ lips 
according to the earliest Gospel (Mark 1:25). 

The true nature of the church 

Anabaptist ecclesiology has always affirmed the church’s 
identity as the kingdom community. Both in its task and 
in its place in God’s cosmic design, the church is called 
to be a genuinely redeemed and redeeming community. 
As a discipled community the church is committed to a 
pattern of corporate life which is a rejection of, and at the 
same time a challenge to, the social configurations of the 
world. The coming of the kingdom of God is seen only to 
the extent that the church grows and expands while at the 
same time demonstrating true Christian community —for 
the church as Christian community is a microcosm of 
God’s cosmic reconciliation (Col. 1:20). Others retort that 
such reconciliation is the consequence of nurture and 
24 


should not be an obstacle to the conversion experience or 
at the inception of churches. “Once people grow in faith 
they will gradually accept others as equals and as brothers 
and sisters,” say those who defend the establishment of 
unicultural churches. 

We ask, however, does not the reality of churches 
around us point to the opposite? Is it not true that many 
churches gradually develop into clubs for religious folk¬ 
lore, becoming increasingly introverted, xenophobic, and 
victims of ethnic, class, or culture captivity? We note sadly 
that, more often than not, large churches with successful 
church growth programs have not made a difference in 
the social, racial, and cultural attitudes of their communi¬ 
ties. My South African experience reminds me that where 
segregation is most deeply entrenched, many white seg¬ 
regationists are born-again Christians whose parents and 
grandparents were also born-again Christians. Their com¬ 
mitment to segregation is not a matter of not having gotten 
round to perfection; it is rather the alliance between a 
formal Christian commitment and a lifestyle which denies 
the gospel itself or subsumes it under a particular racist 
ideology. 

In the absence of specific teaching at the very outset of 
a church’s establishment on the true universal, multi¬ 
cultural, multiethnic nature of the church, the impression 
is conveyed that the particular local church being planted 
is limited to people of one defined ethnic group. However 
much we may protest, communication theorists assert that 
communication is not what you say but what they hear. It 
is therefore important to take cognizance that what they 
hear is that the church and racial segregation are not 
antithetical. We are reminded statistically that Sunday 
morning remains the most segregated segment of the week 
in the United States. Against this we must assert that it is 
wrong to define the church exclusively in ethnic terms. A 
church whose membership is coextensive with only one 
sociocultural group is not a church in any biblical sense. 

Incidentals or essentials 

A further important consideration is the question of 
whether reconciliation is an incidental or essential part of 
the gospel. If it is incidental, there is no reason not to 
postpone this teaching in the life of the new convert or 
new church. The Scriptures, however, make it plain that 
reconciliation is at the very heart of the gospel (2 Cor. 
5:18-20). Reconciliation with God, always assumed and 
declared to be coextensive with reconciliation to one’s 
fellow humanity, is inextricably at the very core of the 
gospel message. Paul speaks of Christ’s salvific act at the 
cross breaking down every barrier and so inaugurating “a 
new creation,” a new humanity (Eph. 2:11-22). This new 
humanity is made up of people of many socioethnic 
backgrounds who have become reconciled to God and to 
each other. It is imperative that prospective Christians be 
counseled regarding the kind of community of which they 
become a part when they accept Christ’s lordship over all 
of their lives. 

Identity and the believers church 

Closely parallel to the foregoing is the ramification of the 
believers church concept espoused by the Anabaptists. 
This particular concept promotes the understanding that 
the Christian’s primary identity is not as a member of a 
particular national, cultural, or ethnic entity, but as a child 
of God. A person’s ethnic or family ties become secondary 
to the new familial relationships with Christian brothers 


and sisters from many tribes and tongues and peoples and 
nations, who together become a part of the family of God 
through the common act of faith in Christ (Rev. 7:9). The 
church, a gathering of the family of God’s people, ought 
to witness to the fact that all other associations—racial, 
national, or cultural—are of secondary significance. 

Peace and nonconformity 

The Anabaptist commitment to the peace witness when 
adequately enunciated is not merely the quest for the 
cessation of hostility and conflict. It requires a commit¬ 
ment to building harmonious, healthy, reconciled commu¬ 
nities. The church, in its witness to peace in a world torn 
apart by many racial hostilities, ethnic conflicts, and 
cultural divisions, must point to the reconciliation and 
harmonious coexistence of these different groups within 
church life. Without the integrity of its own life-witness, 
the church cannot witness for peace in the world. Besides, 
our Anabaptist heritage challenges us to nonconformity in 
the interest of preserving our loyalty to scriptural injunc¬ 
tions. Ethnic churches are often the consequence of 
succumbing to the “way of the world,’’ of conforming to 
patterns in unredeemed society. 


At a time when many despair of the church’s cultural 
captivity and are looking anew at the Anabaptist ecclesi- 
ologica! model (Hauerwas and Willimon 1990), we must 
be vigilant that our eagerness to meet goals does not 
deceive us into surrendering our biblical distinctiveness. 
It is not the largess of our enterprise that will impress the 
world or win us God’s approbation (cf. Rev. 2:8-11), but 
the witness of a church that reflects the triumph of God’s 
grace and love in “making all things new.’’ 

References Cited 

Arias, Mortimer 

1984 Announcing the Reign of God: Evangelism and the Subversive 

Memory of Jesus. Philadelphia: Fortress Press. 

Castro, Emilio 

1985 Sent Free: Mission and Unity in the Perspective of the Kingdom. 

Grand Rapids: Wm. B. Eerdmans. 

Chilton, Bruce and J. I. H. McDonald 

1988 Jesus and the Ethics of the Kingdom. Grand Rapids: Wm. B. 

Eerdmans. 

Hauerwas, Stanley and William Willimon 
1990 “Peculiar People.” Christianity Today (March 5) 16-19. 

1989 Resident Aliens. Nashville: Abingdon Press. 


The church's witness 


How My Understanding of Mission Has Developed 

MILKA RINDZINSKI 


I became a Mennonite Church member in 1956 in 
response to testimonies of the first missionaries who came 
to Uruguay. At that time I understood the mission of the 
church to be calling others to find what I had found—the 
way to a new life of personal holiness. 

The gospel came to me in ethnic and cultural wrappings, 
including European and North American traditions. It was 
also filtered through a system of historic interpretation. 
Coming from a Roman Catholic tradition which I was now 
laying aside, it was important for me to discover and affirm 
my new identity. I took on the Mennonite Christian 
identity with enthusiasm because, by reading available 
Anabaptist literature, I discovered similarities between the 
priest Menno Simon’s concerns and my own. Shortly 
thereafter when, because of my physical appearance, I 
was identified in Uruguayan Evangelical circles as a 
Mennonite, I thought it was amusing. I even saw it as a 
confirmation that I had adopted the right church. Later 
when I traveled in Central American countries I was not 
so happy when my physical appearance caused me to be 


Milka Rindzinski is director of the Study Center for the Mennonite 
Church located in Montevideo, Uruguay. Her thirty years of 
Mennonite involvement includes writing and editing curriculum 
material and leadership roles in her local congregation as well as 
national. Southern Cone, and Latin-American Mennonite Church 
activities. 


called Yankee and gringa. 

The Mennonite Evangelical Seminary in Montevideo 
was inaugurated the same year I was baptized. Through 
the seminary I came into contact with the systematic study 
of the Bible and theology and discovered its importance. 
By helping the seminary director with correspondence 
related to his counseling role with other church workers 
in South American countries, I became conscious of the 
wider Mennonite community. As I shed some of my 
unrealistic notions of the simplicity of the Christian life, I 
came to feel part of this global church community. In 
difficult moments I am grateful to belong to this larger 
family and to know that I am not alone. Books and 
magazines help me understand the concerns and visions 
of other brothers and sisters, many whom I now know 
personally. These persons contributed to my development 
and helped me mature in my convictions. 

I was challenged by local relatives and friends who were 
not part of the church and did not find meaning in a gospel 
“imported’’ by the Mennonites. Even the harshest criti¬ 
cism and the greatest indifference has been useful to 
reaffirm and revise convictions, and to point out the 
imperative of finding a way to embody the gospel in this 
local reality. 

A third area of challenge has been interdenominational 
relationships. Each denomination has its own vision and 
emphases, some of which coincide with ours and some 
which do not. Sometimes the interdenominational activi- 

25 


ties have served to channel personal concerns. Not being 
able to count on total support from our Mennonite group 
has caused some sadness and frustration for me at times; 
other times it has caused me to question. Gathering the 
most biblically radical emphases in church missions into 
a single denomination has been a recurrent dream. 

When I went to Mennonite World Conference in 
Strasbourg, France, in 1984 to participate in the Consul¬ 
tation on Missions, I thought we would observe and 
evaluate the styles and policies of the mission boards, 
because when we speak of missions we think first of 
mission boards and the missionaries who have come from 
other lands. In general, the mission of missionaries was 
always to win souls for Christ, and the churches that were 
formed interpreted their continued task and mission to be 
that of inviting persons around them to be converted and 
saved. I would like to have talked about missionary policies 
in Strasbourg. Nevertheless, our task at the Consultation 
on Missions was to interpret our reason for being, vocation, 
and the lifestyle of the church—in other words, our own 
local group. 

I would say that the preoccupation to discover other 
responsibilities for the church apart from winning souls 
has entered our midst very gradually and is still not very 
pronounced today since there is no unified model. 

As I understand it, the church today (the men and 
women who have accepted the call of God with Christ, 
the head) is the supreme channel by which God has 
chosen to reveal himself. First, I see the church function¬ 
ing as the conscience of humanity, a sensitive nerve and 
spiritual eye, a bridge between humanity and a holy and 
just God. Second, I see the church embodying the good 
news of Jesus Christ in a visible way to the world, taking 
on an alternate lifestyle, such as community living, which 
will necessarily go against the tide. Thirdly, the church’s 
task is determined by multiple and changing human 
needs. In this sense the church should discover that there 
are no areas of human life that escape the interest and 
activity of God. We can see this in Jesus, who ministered 
to human needs at spiritual and personal levels, and who 
realized how the social and power structures affected the 
men and women of his era. 

To accomplish their mission the churches must be 
capable of discerning what the major problems are today 
and occupy themselves with these problems without fear 
of going beyond the limits of their responsibility. Here are 
some examples: 

1. One of the tasks for the Mennonite Church in La 
Floresta could be to raise its voice against the carbide 
factory across the street, with its two tall chimneys and 
huge foundries contaminating the air of a densely popu¬ 
lated area of the capital. 

2. The poor and impoverished people of areas which 
surround the church knock at our doors. They come with 
their carts and look through our garbage cans for anything 
useful. We put our old bread in plastic bags so it won’t get 
dirty and they can eat it. They try to sell us small objects, 
and we buy them. They ask for food and clothing, and 
sometimes we give it to them. They steal the wash off our 
clotheslines, and we report it to the police, hoping to 
recover it. We build high fences, hoping they will be 
discouraged and not enter again. And we hardly speak 
with them. We are not interested in knowing about their 
situation, what they think or feel. We don’t pay any more 
attention to them than to birds. 

3. Those who suffer because of injustice demand our 

26 


compassion and attention. But there are a series of words 
with negative connotations at which we cringe: justice, 
oppression, liberation, poverty. These terms and their 
meanings should be carefully examined with the Bible in 
hand because there is a tendency to spiritualize them. 
There is also a tendency to look at those who suffer and 
then decide who deserves our active compassion and who 
doesn’t. Allegedly the church is forbidden to enter polit¬ 
ical territory, but I suspect in many cases it is simply fear 
of suffering that makes us “spiritual’’ to the point that we 
avoid political issues which could be dangerous to our 
physical integrity. 

During times of military government in my country I 
was part of an interdenominational group that dealt with 
matters of mutual interest to the churches we represented. 
We discussed a project to create a psychological/spiritual 
service for the children of prisoners. Many children saw 
their parents snatched out of their homes never to return. 
Surely these children needed attention. The project was 
rejected by the government, and we did not dare to insist. 
Why do we renounce a service project so quickly when 
the government opposes it? To what point do we owe 
them obedience? This question needs to be examined. 

4. In general, our churches don’t express themselves on 
questions of political nature. I’m not saying that the church 
is called to govern politically nor that there can be a truly 
just government. But I do observe that justice-making is 
left to personal judgment and, as a result, church members 
look for orientation and channels of expression outside 
the church. Uruguay is a highly political country; we are 
legally obligated to vote, so it is impossible not to think, 
hold opinions, or have some political concerns. 

Even those who maintain that politics are forbidden 
territory for the church have and express opinions. As a 
newspaper reporter said recently, they applaud when they 
hear on television that an evangelist from the Northern 
Hemisphere calls some governments in Central America 
“Satan” and thanks the president of the United States for 
helping the nation recover the faith. 

It is lamentable that churches in general don’t warn that, 
even if communism is atheistic, other systems can also lead 
to idolatry. 

5. This same prejudice that church and politics must 
remain separate is the reason prophetic activity in the 
church is vague (“great things will happen”). I believe it 
is necessary to talk seriously about the topic in order to 
distinguish between “doing politics” and fulfilling our call 
to denounce injustice. 

Of course, if the church makes its prophetic voice heard 
it will attract suffering to itself. Recently, meetings were 
held in Argentina where high-level military commanders 
from Latin America discussed how to confront liberation 
theology, among other things. It is considered revolution¬ 
ary because, with its consciousness-raising work of choos¬ 
ing for the poor and by its demands for justice, it threatens 
the stability of those in power. 

On the other hand, this danger of suffering makes many 
churches—in their zeal to make it clear they have no ties 
with liberation theology—spiritualize the concepts of 
peace, justice, liberation, and oppression. 

Mennonite churches need to discover that they are heirs 
of a theological line that constitutes a third option. 

6. The churches should be more sagacious in identifying 
the idols that claim our loyalty so that we understand our 
rejection of any lordship outside of the lordship of Jesus 
Christ. I remember once, when I was new in the evangel- 



ical Mennonite faith and very patriotic, that I stood up 
when I heard the national anthem. The pastor looked at 
me with a condescending smile that intrigued me. I did 
not ask for explanations and none were given. It would 
have been a good opportunity to talk about the lordship 
of Jesus Christ. Many years later I discovered that the 
content of the anthem and the concept of patriotism 
contained demands that clashed with the demands of 
Jesus Christ. And patriotism is only one of the many idols 
which exist. 

7. Churches should clarify what sin is today. It is 
necessary to read the Bible from a present-day viewpoint 
and, departing from biblical examples, help one another 
discern what is morally good or bad in our complicated 
world. It could be that we are laying aside sins that are 
disguised but are far-reaching and have great disintegrat¬ 
ing power. I continue to believe that as followers of Christ 
we are called to a life of holiness and purity where there 
is no place for a double morality. 

8. In light of the diversity of emphases among the various 
churches and denominations, one of the greatest chal¬ 
lenges is the search for unity. For some reason we are 
inclined to compartmentalize ourselves. When we acquire 
a vision, we tend to concentrate on and emphasize it, 
even losing interest in all other emphases. This attitude 
denotes a mental and spiritual narrowness that must be 
corrected. We could ask ourselves if the emphases answer 


to different callings. Our challenge is to find ways to 
integrate various efforts so that the ministry of the com¬ 
bined churches can minister to the total person in all areas 
of life. 

I believe the church needs to discover that the Lord s 
calling to unity is not a calling to be identical in every¬ 
thing—in style of praise or understanding of how we serve 
our neighbor—but to love and respect each other, with 
mutual correction and help. 

9. The Mennonite churches should deepen their radical 
and pacifistic Anabaptist tradition. Mennonite church 
members in Uruguay are mainly first-generation Chris¬ 
tians from Roman Catholic and Pentecostal backgrounds. 
So the mission task of the church often marks the more 
active interdenominational or inter-American movements. 
And generally, the one that is most appealing is the one 
that is the most spiritual. 

Unless the Mennonite churches discover and are faith¬ 
ful to the task that the Lord entrusts to them by sharing 
the vision they have inherited with the community of faith, 
the name “Mennonite” and being a Mennonite confer¬ 
ence does not have true meaning. 

In some cases, tradition can be a hindrance. In other 
cases, clarifying our identity offers support and can mark 
a course. In the end, following a tradition can mean 
making good use of a heritage of wisdom. 


In Review 


Glimpses of Glory. By Dave and Neta 
Jackson. Elgin, IL: Brethren Press, 1987; 
324 pp., $14.95 (pb) 

Reviewed by Ed Bontrager 

For others like me who knew about Reba 
Place Fellowship but never understood its 
unique community of ministry, this book 
will be helpful. Dave and Neta Jackson are 
members of the Fellowship since 1973. 
Their easy style of reporting events sea¬ 
soned with illustrations provides an intri¬ 
guing account. 

The authors highlight four eras: Radical 
Launching (1951-61); Consolidation Out¬ 
reach (1962-71); The Spirit, the Power, 
and the Excess (1972-78); Repentance, 
Regrouping, and Renewal (1979-87). The 
vicissitudes of corporate life as the com¬ 
munity struggled through these eras un¬ 
cover some darker travailing times, yet the 
message is clear that God builds his people 


CORRECTION 

In the March 1990 issue of Mission 
Focus , the editors omitted an intro¬ 
duction of Linford Stutzman, author 
of the article An Incamational Ap¬ 
proach to Mission in Modem Affluent 
Societies. Working with Eastern Men¬ 
nonite Board of Missions, Linford and 
his wife, Janet, have given leadership 
to the Perth Mennonite Fellowship in 
Lathlain, Australia since 1987. 


as they take each other seriously. 

Reba Place was formed as a setting 
where ideas of the church (Acts 4) and the 
sixteenth-century Anabaptist movement 
could combine to find fulfillment in the 
twentieth century. The “common life’’ was 
the ideal. The community became a light¬ 
house for shipwrecked people, providing 
healing, counseling, friendship, and the 
message of spiritual grace. Inclusiveness 
and involvement in a large, loving family 
provided an anchor, also seen in their 
worship style which included drama, 
dance, and a more charismatic expression. 

In the early ’80s it was decided to form 
two expressions of the community, one for 
those who wanted to maintain the “com¬ 
mon life,” and one as a congregational 
expression without the “common life.” And 
the congregation grew. 

This history portrays the joining of word 
and deed, evangelism and social service—a 
model that needs to be applied to many 
more congregations. This is a helpful re¬ 
source for churches intent in moving be¬ 
yond maintenance to mission. Jacksons do 
not convey that this vision is easy to realize 
but show that intense fellowship and vi¬ 
sionary leadership can bring effective 
kingdom work. 


Ed Bontrager, with previous pastoral as¬ 
signments in Ohio, California, and Pennsyl¬ 
vania, is currently Director of Evangelism 
and Church Development for Mennonite 
Board of Missions, Elkhart, Indiana. 


The Unseen Face of Islam. By Bill Musk. 
Eastbourne, East Sussex, England: Mon¬ 
arch Publications, 1989; 314 pp., 7.99 
pounds sterling 

Reviewed by Roelf Kuitse 

Dr. Bill Musk has worked with Middle East 
Media and with the Episcopal Church in 
Egypt. His book deals with what has been 
called “folk Islam,” the Islam experienced 
and expressed by people in villages and 
cities who struggle daily with forces that 
try to harm human life. In this vulnerable 
life, “baraka,” “the evil eye,” “jinn,” and 
“saints” play an important role. The author 
helps readers to understand this “unusual 
kind of Islam,” which in general does not 
get much attention in books about Islam. 
Attention is paid to holy times and holy 
places, holy things and holy persons, holy 
powerful words, and holy actions. All these 
phenomena are manifestations of a special 
worldview. This worldview is described in 
the second part of the book. In many cases 
this view of reality is in conflict with the 
view of official Islam, but, according to Dr. 
Musk, this view is “accepted and even 
nurtured within the embrace of the alter¬ 
native, official worldview” (p. 225). 

The book also deals with biblical views 
of reality and with the ways missionaries 
can respond to the challenges of folk Islam 
and the longings and fears which find 
expression in folk Islam. 

This is an excellent book, one which 
helps us in understanding the role of Islam 

27 


in the lives of many people. The book 
should be read by all who have established 
relations with the Muslim neighbor. 


Roelf Kuitse has been a professor of mis¬ 
sions and world religions at Associated 
Mennonite Biblical Seminary, Elkhart, In¬ 
diana. 

New Testament Ethics. By Dale Gold¬ 
smith. Elgin, IL: Brethren Press, 1988, 185 
pp., $9.95 (pb) 

Reviewed by Elmer A. Martens 

A book that surveys eight New Testament 
writers in as many chapters and begins 
with James, Paul, and Peter would seem to 
be omitting Jesus. Not so! Each writer, 
including Matthew, Mark, Luke and John, 
is interrogated as to his understanding of 
Jesus. Convictions inform ethics. 

Pauline material is focused on con¬ 
science, which functions primarily as an 
“after-the-act analyzer.” Not rules, but 
needs of others, govern ethics. 

Goldsmith is shy on specifics, for he 
contends that ethics is more a matter of 
character than lists of dos and don’ts. 
Given new situations and the fact that 
ethical directives cannot emcompass all 
situations anyway, the author urges that 
Christian ethics is essentially the ethics of 
love to others. This is the one ethical 
directive that all New Testament writers 
share. 

The book’s strength is citing the “angle 
of vision” governing each New Testament 
writer’s ethical statement, the repeated 
emphasis on love as expressing the will of 
God ethically, and helpful insights, such as 
Matthew’s call to be creative. End-of-chap- 
ter questions for reflection facilitate use of 
the book for Bible classes. 

The author fears legalism. Sadly, rather 
than to present an adequate theology of 
law, legal-type material is disparaged. 
Somewhat worrisome is the notion that we 
need to dialogue with the New Testament 
but that our answers lie outside it. More is 
needed on how love is to be specifically 
fleshed out. Goldsmith, an ordained 
Princeton-educated Presbyterian minister 
and now administrator/teacher at McPher¬ 
son College, has nevertheless provided a 
solid popularly-written contribution to the 
growing literature on biblical ethics. 


Elmer A. Martens, formerly President of 
Mennonite Brethren Biblical Seminary in 
Fresno, California, continues as Professor of 
Old Testament. 

28 


What Makes a Missionary . By David M. 
Howard. Chicago, IL: Moody Press, 1987, 
96 pp., $5.95 (pb) 

Reviewed by Wanda Derksen-Bergen 

Howard has addressed an important topic 
which could lend itself to elaborate theo¬ 
ries and intellectual theology, but instead 
he has chosen to bring his thoughts down 
to earth in a simple, straight-forward man¬ 
ner. 

Howard follows the life of Peter and how 
Jesus prepares Peter step-by-step for ser¬ 
vice. He begins with Jesus calling Peter, 
followed by the growth of Peter and even 
the failures of Peter as a missionary. We 
then continue to read how Jesus restored 
Peter and gave him triumph as a person 
called to be a missionary to the Gentiles. 
Jesus challenges Peter to serve with humil¬ 
ity, love, and compassion for all persons. 
Howard includes accounts of personal ex¬ 
periences along with the study of Peter 
and challenges readers to examine 
whether they, too, have the spirit and 
character to serve with the humility, love, 
and compassion exemplified by Jesus. 

My main disappointment in this book is 
that it lacks any tone of radical discipleship 
or fresh ideas. Although we need to be 
reminded of the basics of missionary ser¬ 
vice, I miss the challenge of being on the 
cutting edge, forced to explore new ave¬ 
nues of what it takes to be a missionary. 
However, the simplicity of the book opens 
it up to a wide audience of people. 


Wanda Derksen-Bergen is Co-Personnel 
Secretary for the Commission on Overseas 
Mission of the General Conference Menno¬ 
nite Church in Newton, Kansas. 


Teaching to Change Lives. By Howard G. 
Hendricks. Portland, OR: Multnomah 
Press, 1987, 180 pp., $9.95, $7.95 (pb) 

Reviewed by Daniel Schipani 

In this how-to book, Howard G. Hendricks, 
well-known author and lecturer in evan¬ 
gelical circles, articulates what he calls the 
“passion to communicate” the Word of 
God in terms of seven principles or “laws.” 
He does that by utilizing the word teacher 
as an acronym—t-e-a-c-h-e-r. The book 
thus consists of seven chapters, each one 
dealing with a major principle: 1) The law 
of the teacher— ongoing personal growth 


is essential for teaching; 2) the law of 
education —how people learn determines 
how you teach; 3) the law of activity —max¬ 
imum learning is the result of maximum 
involvement in meaningful activity; 4) the 
law of communication —to truly impart in¬ 
formation requires the building of bridges; 
5) the law of the heart —teaching that 
impacts is not head to head, but heart to 
heart; 6) the law of encouragement —teach¬ 
ing tends to be most effective when the 
learner is properly motivated; 7) the law 
of readiness —the teaching-learning pro¬ 
cess will be most effective when both 
students and teacher are adequately pre¬ 
pared. 

Easy to read, with many anecdotes, prac¬ 
tical pointers, and suggestions for further 
exploration, this book can be a nice gift to 
teachers in Sunday school as well as other 
settings. It can be used for teacher training 
provided that biblico-theological and edu¬ 
cational foundations are properly dealt 
with elsewhere. 


Daniel Schipani is Professor of Christian 
Education and Personality at Associated 
Mennonite Biblical Seminaries, Elkhart, In¬ 
diana. 


Ministry of Missions to African Indepen¬ 
dent Churches. Edited by David A. Shank. 
Elkhart, IN: Mennonite Board of Missions, 
1987 (reprinted 1989), 291 pp., $21.50 
(pb) plus postage 

Reviewed by Hans Kasdorf 

David Shank has been engaged in a variety 
of ministries among the African Indepen¬ 
dent Churches (AICs) in French West 
Africa since 1976. 

In July 1986 the Mennonite Board of 
Missions sponsored a Conference on Min¬ 
istry to the AICs held at Abidjan, Cote 
d’Ivoire. Shank was the prime architect 
behind this venture. His objective was 
twofold: a) to bring together AIC leaders 
from various groups who would not other¬ 
wise meet each other to discuss differ¬ 
ences as well as similarities and common 
goals; b) to assist Western Christians in 
getting a better understanding of the way 
the Lord is building his church in Africa. 
The book is evidence that Shank suc¬ 
ceeded remarkably well with the first ob¬ 
jective; the second depends on the number 
and type of people reading the book. 


The book consists of papers read at the 
conference by a team of resource persons 
from Africa, America, and Europe who 
know from personal experience and scien¬ 
tific studies both history and makeup of the 
AICs. Introductory materials, 14 chapters, 
and several appendices offer at least 18 
windows through which anglophone read¬ 
ers around the world can take an objective 
look at the AIC origins and developments, 
structures and relationships, worldviews 
and struggles, concerns and aspirations. 

This phenomenal movement of our time 
has some 30 million followers involving 
about 8,000 African denominations. The 
names alone are intriguing: Power in 
Christ Church; Church of Abraham; Tovi- 
ator Healing Church; Almighty Jehovah 
Jesus Christ Church; Christ Action 
Church; and God Have Mercy Church (cf. 
pp. 59-86). 

Missiologists, mission leaders, church 
historians, and pastors who want to know 
what God is doing in Africa should read 
this book. 


Hans Kasdorf is Professor of World Mission 
and department chair at Mennonite 
Brethren Biblical Seminary, Fresno, Cali¬ 
fornia. 


Witness: Empowering the Church. By A. 
Grace Wenger and Dave and Neta Jack- 
son. Scottdale, PA: Herald Press, 1989,196 
pp., $8.95 (pb) 

Reviewed by Arnie Neufeld 

The authors of this book believe that the 
primary and urgent task of the church is 
to “go and make disciples of all nations.” 
They maintain that telling “others about 
Christ is not an option like dessert after a 
full meal. It is part of the nature of being 
Christian.... Winning others to Christ is not 
one of the many duties of the church... 
Winning others to Christ is the church’s 
reason for existence” (p. 28). 

The book contends that the mission of 
the church has not been placed into the 
hands of a select few, nor is it the respon¬ 
sibility of leaders. Rather, all members of 
the body of Christ should contribute to and 
participate in this important venture. 

In order to be effective in outreach, 
Christians must be renewed in worship, 
directed by the Holy Spirit, and encour¬ 
aged and supported through the fellowship 


of the church. However, worship and fel¬ 
lowship are not only the blessing of those 
who have become members of the “believ¬ 
ing family”; they are “part of the content 
of the Christian message” (p. 124). Recog¬ 
nizing the value of care groups, the authors 
provide helpful suggestions on how to 
organize, strengthen, and enlarge such fel¬ 
lowship groups in the church. They pro¬ 
vide many Scripture references, 
illustrations, and stories, and leave the 
reader with the message: “We did it; you 
can, too.” 

Each of the 13 chapters concludes with 
a series of discussion questions. The book 
could be used as an effective guide in a 
church study group, or serve as a text in a 
more formal classroom situation. It is prac¬ 
tical, biblical, and inspirational. We recom¬ 
mend it highly. 


Arnie Neufeld, Winkler, Manitoba, is pastor 
of the Bergthaler Mennonite Church. 


Mennonites in China. By Robert and Alice 
Ruth Ramseyer. Winnipeg, MB: China Ed¬ 
ucational Exchange, 1988 (revised 1989), 
115 pp., $5.00 U.S., $6.00 Canada (pb) 

Reviewed by Hugh Sprunger 

It is appropriate and commendable that 
the China Educational Exchange, a coop¬ 
erative effort of different Mennonite 
church groups relating to China, commis¬ 
sioned the writing and publishing of this 
book. It meets a long-felt need on the part 
of many Mennonite China-watchers and 
participants in work in China and among 
Chinese people. Different Mennonite 
groups worked in China in the first half of 
the twentieth century. They essentially 
worked independently and each group 
published its own accounts of its work in 
China, the churches, leaders, and mission¬ 
aries. The story of Mennonites in China 
was fragmented. It was difficult to get an 
overall picture. 

The Ramseyers, in brief compass, give 
the big picture of Mennonites in China 
from 1895 up to about 1951, with some 
glimpses about churches and leaders in the 
years since that time. The Mennonite story 
is preceded with a short summary of Chris¬ 
tian mission in China in chapter one. Chro¬ 
nologically and geographically, the 
Mennonite story then unfolds from 1901 
on Shandong-Henan border to Fujian, 
Inner Mongolia, and West China. It is a 


fascinating story. The historical sweep 
ends with an afterword. This chapter gives 
credit to many Mennonite efforts for a 
holistic gospel emphasis but faults Men¬ 
nonites, like many others, for failing to 
emphasize mutuality in sharing. This brief 
summary is most helpful and raises ques¬ 
tions for present and future relationships 
with Chinese people and Christians. 

The book is not intended to be a defin¬ 
itive history of Mennonite missions in 
China or the story of missionaries. How¬ 
ever, a list of Mennonite missionaries is 
appended. The focus is on the churches 
and leaders which emerged in China as a 
result of Mennonite work there. This em¬ 
phasis is noteworthy. 

This is an important book for all persons 
interested in missions and overseas 
churches. Mennonites from all different 
backgrounds and groups should read it to 
be aware of what sister Mennonites did in 
China. Not only North American ethnic 
Mennonites need to read this book but also 
Chinese Mennonites in North America, 
Taiwan, Hong Kong, and China in order to 
be aware of the larger family of which they 
are a part. 


Hugh Sprunger is a Mennonite missionary, 
first working in Taiwan with the Commis¬ 
sion on Overseas Mission of the General 
Conference Mennonite Church from 1954- 
1979, and now working with Eastern Men¬ 
nonite Board of Missions in Hong Kong 
from 1980 to the present. 


Gospel, Church, and Kingdom. By James 
A. Scherer. Minneapolis, MN: Augsburg 
Publishing House, 1987, 271 pp., $14.95 
(pb) 

Reviewed by Calvin E. Shenk 

The author intends that this book “provide 
students and teachers of world missions— 
along with missionaries, pastors, mission 
executives, lay mission interpreters, and 
church leaders generally—with resource 
material for the study of recent develop¬ 
ments in the theology of mission” (p. 5). 
It is a synoptic and comparative view of 
recent mission theology from an ecumen¬ 
ical perspective with the intent of promot¬ 
ing conversation and understanding 
among Christians of differing traditions 
concerning faithfulness to the great com¬ 
mission. 

This is an excellent book. It is thorough 

29 


in drawing material from a wide variety of 
missiological conferences, consultations, 
councils, and seminars. It combines his¬ 
tory and theology in a way that highlights 
the trends of development. The author is 
fair in representing the traditions. His 
interpretive remarks are concise, but they 
appropriately identify issues for thought 
and conversation. Though admitting that 
the missionary movement in the West is in 
crisis, the author is not pessimistic but 
neither does he want us to nostalgically 
return to the past. Rather, this should be 
a call to realistic vision for the present and 
future. 

Interpretation and critique are major 
strengths of this book. There is formal 
critique at the end of the chapters on the 
evangelical movement and the Roman 
Catholic tradition. Unfortunately, there is 
not a similar kind of summary and critique 
at the end of the chapters on the conciliar 
movement. This could have strengthened 
even more the comparative dimensions. 

I especially value the introductory chap¬ 
ter characterizing the new context for 
global mission and the last chapter which 
identifies crucial issues for mission theol¬ 
ogy. I commend the author for his insis¬ 
tence on theological clarification. As an 
Anabaptist, I also found his chapter on the 
history of Lutheran theology of mission to 
be very helpful. He has stimulated me to 
look again at the theology of mission in the 
early stages of the Reformation. 

I applaud the author for his very stimu¬ 
lating work and highly recommend a care¬ 
ful reading of this book. It forces one to 
examine more deliberately the relationship 
of mission practice to clear theological 
reflection. 


Calvin E. Shenk is chair of the Bible and 
Religion Department of Eastern Mennonite 
College. 


Power and Beliefs in South Africa. By 
Klaus Nurnberger. Pretoria, South Africa: 
University of South Africa, 1988, 319 pp., 
18 pounds sterling 

Reviewed by Stan Nussbaum 

When Nurnberger introduces his work as 
a study of “the interaction between eco¬ 
nomic power structures and patterns of 
conviction seen in the light of a Christian 
ethic” (p.l), the casual reader may suppose 
he or she has heard it all before. This is not 


a book for casual readers. 

The perceptive reader will soon find that 
Nurnberger attempts and largely succeeds 
to posit an innovative paradigm bringing 
together “hard” or statistical data dealing 
with economics and power and “soft” in¬ 
tangible data dealing with convictions. This 
experimental method does incredible 
things, such as relating in one diagram (p. 
85) a quantified total of a person’s eco¬ 
nomic needs (based on physical essentials, 
social group expectations and personal 
wishes) with the person’s income position 
at the economic center or periphery of a 
society. Looking at this I felt I was concep¬ 
tually “seeing” for the first time what pov¬ 
erty is. 

The experience of “seeing” is the one I 
had repeatedly as I read this book. Some¬ 
times this had to do with applications 
Nurnberger made—why Bantus tans will 
never work economically (p. 23), why local 
elites in the third world are unconcerned 
about the poor in their countries (p. 68), 
why the poor buy radios they cannot afford 
(p. 1021), why corruption is rampant in 
postindependent Africa (p. 161), and, not 
least, why a feudal pattern carried over into 
a modern competitive setting produces 
oppression, i.e., why apartheid is what it is 
(p. 173f). At other times Nurnberger’s 
discussion gave me a new perspective on 
some old problems and issues in my own 
experience—a realization of the crucial 
difference between “available” and 
“operative” information (p. 139) in missiol- 
ogy and mission administration; a revela¬ 
tion about why my work and personal 
schedules are so full (p. 273, “The rich are 
plagued by an overabundance of 
potency ”); how the Fall has affected all 
aspects of individual and corporate life (p. 
283, cf. p. 139); why the justification of war 
seems plausible, though it is false (p. 145). 

Charts and diagrams are extremely valu¬ 
able throughout the book (e.g., pp. 47, 65, 
85), but a few improvements are still pos¬ 
sible in this area. Why is figure 12 men¬ 
tioned on page 51, given in statistics on 
page 52, and graphed on page 59? Why is 
no diagram given correlating the material 
on evangelism and social justice on pages 
270-86 analogous to the diagram on page 
139? (This could have been a powerful 
summary of the book’s implications.) Why 
is no explicit connection made between 
the two major diagrams in the book, pages 
139 and 283, since they obviously relate to 
each other? 

Some theological questions also must be 
raised. We need to know more about 
Nurnberger’s rejection of virtually all dog¬ 
matic criteria for church fellowship except 


“Christ’s redemptive love” (p. 295). Has he 
overreacted to apartheid’s exclusiveness 
and produced too inclusive a view of the 
church? Again, is he too optimistic about 
the church providing a model which sec¬ 
ular society will see and follow (p. 298)? 

These questions do not detract from the 
book’s central thrust, which perhaps could 
be summed up as the interaction between 
vested interests and worldview. Where 
else do we find the same writer dealing so 
well with both these issues in one model 
from the perspective of Christian ethics? 
There is much to learn here, and not only 
about South Africa. This is a book about 
what makes the world go around and what 
makes it go around painfully. 


Stan Nussbaum is director of the Centre for 
New Religious Movements at Selly Oak 
Colleges in Birmingham, England. From 
1977 through 1983 he worked in Lesotho 
under Africa Inter-Mennonite Mission. 


Aspiring to Freedom. Edited by Kenneth 
A. Myers. Grand Rapids, MI: Eerdmans, 
1988, 169 pp., $10.95 (pb) 

Reviewed by Roelf Kuitse 

“The social concerns of the Church” 
(,Sollicitudo Rei Socialis) is the subject of a 
papal encyclical written by Pope John Paul 
II and published in 1988. In this encyclical 
letter the present pope expresses his 
views—like his predecessor Paul VI did in 
1967 in his encyclical Populorum Pro- 
gressio —in regard to today’s social issues. 
The main attention is focused on the issue 
of development, the relation between poor 
and rich nations. Related to this, the papal 
letter deals with issues like the arms trade, 
the debt problem, refugees, terrorism, 
ecology, demography, human rights, un¬ 
employment. The pope rejects a concept 
of development reduced to the economic 
component. Ethical as well as religious 
components are also important. He criti¬ 
cizes the liberal-capitalistic and the Marx¬ 
ist-communistic ideologies, the first 
because it absolutizes “the all-consuming 
desire for profit,” the second because it 
absolutizes the “thirst for power” (p. 37). 
Both ideologies are a hindrance to a real 
and full development and interdepen¬ 
dence. 

Commentaries on this encyclical are 
written by authors related to the Rockford 


30 


Institute Center on Religion and Society. 
All the commentators express their satis¬ 
faction with the encyclical’s emphasis on 
“the right of economic initiative” and “the 
creative subjectivity of the citizen.” They 
strongly criticize “the moral parallelism” 
(Michael Novak) between the two blocs, 
capitalism and communism. This moral 
equivalence is in contradiction with what 
the pope writes about human rights, the 
right of economic initiative, and the ethi¬ 
cal/religious components of development. 
Peter Berger speaks about the language of 
the papal letter as the language of ter- 
cermundismo (third-worldism), a language 
used by “the peace and justice crowd who 
have a high stake in speaking of East and 
West in morally equivalent terms.” His 
grade for the encyclical is between a B- 
and a C+. 


Roelf S. Kuitse has been Professor of Mis¬ 
sions and World Religions at Associated 
Mennonite Biblical Seminaries, Elkhart, In¬ 
diana. 


The Church and Cultures: New Perspec¬ 
tives in Missiological Anthropology. By 
Louis J. Luzbetak. Maryknoll, NY: Orbis 
Books, 1988, 464 pp., $19.95. 

Reviewed by Levi Keidel 

Serving in the Pontifical Council for Cul¬ 
ture, Vatican City, Luzbetak authored The 
Church and Cultures: An Applied Anthro¬ 
pology for the Religious Worker in 1963. It 
became an undisputed classic in the field. 
This new edition is an updated and ex¬ 
panded form of his previous work, provid¬ 
ing what appears to be his definitive 
statement. His earlier work was directed 
toward the western church worker who 
sought to effect cultural change from with¬ 
out. In keeping with the current trend 
away from foreign missions to global mis¬ 
sions, this volume is addressed to ecclesial 
workers in local church communities who 
effect change from within. 

The thesis of the book is that anthropo¬ 
logical insights can and should improve 
mission strategy and effectiveness. It is the 
author’s concern that such insights facili¬ 
tate a form of contextualization that makes 
Jesus relevant. 

Luzbetak’s treatment is thorough, histor¬ 
ical, and documented. Often he furnishes 
a paragraph of bibliographic resources to 
facilitate thematic research. His style is 
simple and straightforward; the nature and 
scope of his subject precludes the written 
text which is quickly and easily grasped. 

Chapter one gives theological founda¬ 


tions for the subject, chapter two defines 
the nature and scope of missiological an¬ 
thropology, and chapter three provides 
theoretical and historical models of mis¬ 
sion. It closes on a prophetic note—that 
we are moving away from the vision of 
global Christendom toward a situation 
where Christians will form a minority, and 
that the task of the church will be making 
Christ globally accessible. In chapter four, 
the author develops issues that impact 
mission, including the effects of Vatican II 
upon Roman Catholic theology of mission. 

Then follows a scrupulous study (241 
pages) of the phenomenon of culture. 
“Cultures are like a ball of tangled strings 
... one must study the particular tangled 
whole and see which string must be tack¬ 
led first, which knot must be untied now 
and which later” (p. 244). Luzbetak exam¬ 
ines anthropological developments: how 
culture is perceived, understood as a sys¬ 
tem, the nature of its dynamics, the factors 
which facilitate or resist its change. A final 
chapter attempts to synthesize anthropo¬ 
logical theory of the preceding chapters 
into functioning models for the church. 

This volume is not everybody’s cup of 
tea; but for persons whose responsibility it 
is to be on the cutting edge of mission 
strategy, it provides a wealth of essential 
scientific knowledge. 


Levi Keidel is currently Instructor of Mis¬ 
sion at Columbia Bible College, Clearbrook, 
British Columbia. 


31 




Editorial 


One of the themes dominating the agenda of the churches 
in the West today is pluralism. Whether it is theology, 
culture, or religion, we find ourselves living in a time of 
great mobility. I continue to be fascinated by the traffic 
that passes through the world’s airports. These are the 
main concourses where peoples of the most diverse social, 
national, and economic backgrounds come together. It is 
not uncommon to see people from rural villages of Africa 
or Asia, still feeling awkward and unfamiliar with technol¬ 
ogy, in the airports of the world’s major capitals. This is a 
metaphor for what is happening worldwide. We cannot 
escape the effects of this rapid multiform movement. How 
are we as Christians responding to this changing situation? 

1. Religions variety. Birmingham, England, is represen¬ 
tative of many major cities of the West where there has 
been a steady growth in the number of people of Asian 
and African background over the past twenty years— 
today 15 percent of Birmingham’s population would be in 
this category. The Central Mosque in Birmingham is the 
largest mosque west of Istanbul, but it is only one of fifty 
in the city. The majority of these people live in the 
crowded central sections of Birmingham. Since they 
originated in a variety of countries, they have brought 
their ethnic differences with them. Thus they tend to live 
as communal groups. The majority of them were villagers 
without special skills or education, and they have ended 
up on the lower rung of the social and economic ladder. 
One reaction of immigrant communities is to intensify 
their religious life as they sense the tension between the 
new culture and their culture of origin. They are especially 
eager to pass on to their children their own faith tradition. 
It is a situation filled with tensions and anxieties. 

2. Church variety. Church gatherings beyond the con¬ 
gregational level are increasingly characterized by variety 
in piety, styles of worship, and nationality. For some 
people this is still a novelty, and the experience of such 
diversity is captivating. More important than these diver¬ 
sities is that which is given to us as the basis for unity. The 
whole of the post-Babel human story is dominated by our 
dividedness. What is worth celebrating is that we have 


been given a chance for a new beginning in the work of 
Jesus Christ. Human differences remain, but these are to 
be reevaluated in light of the “broken wall.” A more sober 
assessment of these differences helps us recognize that 
these divisions come about over the simplest matters and 
remain a source of sinning against each other. 

3. Theological variety. Theological strife and divisions 
continue to dog the steps of the church. No theological 
idea appears in a vacuum. It is the product of a history 
and relationships and tendencies. Free church Protes¬ 
tants, with their emphasis on individual responsibility, 
divide and subdivide with alarming ease. Roman Catholics 
are presently debating John Paul II’s call for “A New 
Evangelization” because some hear this as an appeal to 
restore traditional Christendom. It has created unrest 
because the appeal is seen within a particular history. 
Theological variety may stem from historical, cultural, 
psychological, or other “non-theological” differences. 

J. B. Metz has proposed that one way of mediating 
between these differences is that of memory. “The 
Church, of course, from its beginnings, is a remembering 
and retelling community gathered around the eucharist 
to devote itself to following Jesus.” Memory is thus 
centered on suffering and redemption. 

One of the special problems of Western theology is its 
dependence on a particular Western intellectual tradition 
that emphasizes rationality and system. The act of remem¬ 
bering and retelling puts the emphasis elsewhere: human 
weakness and sin, God’s grace and sovereignty, death and 
resurrection, the movement from despair to hope, God’s 
coming to us and our response in worship. 

As A. F. Walls demonstrates, the Christian message has 
shown an amazing vitality in moving across cultural 
boundaries over time. This act of translation calls for a 
corollary. Translation highlights the power of the gospel 
to enter particular situations and there become “good 
news.” But the process is not completed until translation 
issues in incorporation into the universal fullness of the 
new humanity in Christ Jesus. 

—Wilbert R. Shenk 


POSTMASTER: Send Form 3579 to Box 370, Elkhart, IN 46515-0370 
32 


September 1990 
Volume 18 Number 3 


MISSION 

FOCUS 



The Growth of the Early Church 

Reflections on Recent Literature 

ALAN KREIDER 


Why did the early church grow? For most of this century 
the reflexive response of scholars to this has been, “Look 
in Harnack.” Adolf von Harnack’s The Mission and Expan¬ 
sion of Christianity is one of the heavyweight books of 
church history; it has filled the footnotes of generations 
of scholars. For a long time, as far as these writers were 
concerned, it seemed that the topic of the early church’s 
mission had been “done.” 

No longer. Within the current decade, scholars are 
beginning to look anew at the growth of the early—post- 
apostolic, pre-Constantinian—church. One of these schol¬ 
ars, the Roman Catholic Norbert Brox, wrote an important 
article, On Christian Mission in Late Antiquity , from a 
perspective similar to Harnack—that of church history. 
Two others, Ramsay MacMullen and Robin Lane Fox, 
have fresh things to say because their books come at the 
topic from a different angle. Both are eminent classicists, 
bringing the perspectives of ancient history and literature 
to bear on the life of the early Christians. MacMullen’s 
Christianizing the Roman Empire argues a dubious thesis 
with learning and panache; Lane Fox’s Pagan and Chris¬ 
tian, on the other hand, is a magisterial study. 

Brox, Lane Fox, and MacMullen offer insights that 
fascinate and invite us to ponder our own time in new 
ways. Drawing from all three, and occasionally from other 
authorities as well, we can listen critically to this new 
generation’s approaches to the growth of the early church. 

To begin with, the early church was a growing church. 
On this obvious fact, both Lane Fox and MacMullen make 
fascinating observations. Lane Fox notes that there are 
few statistics, and that these must be interpreted with care. 
In Rome in A.D. 251, for example, there were 154 
ministers of one sort or another and 1,500 widows and 
poor people; ten years earlier, in Dura Europos on the 
Euphrates, a wall was knocked down in the house where 
the church met, allowing 60 persons rather than 30 to 
attend the meetings. From figures like these, Lane Fox 
infers a small but growing Christian movement. It was 
widely scattered throughout the ancient world, most 
densely rooted in the cities, and “very much the 


Alan and Eleanor Kreider, overseas workers with Mennonite 
Board of Missions, have lived in London, England, since 1974. 


exception” in the countryside. Less cautious than Lane 
Fox, MacMullen hazards an approximate growth rate for 
early Christianity. From the end of the first century, the 
Christian church grew by approximately one-half million 
members per generation, giving a total of five million 
members—8 percent of the imperial population—at the 
time of Constantine s conversion in A.D. 312. (Lane Fox’s 
estimate is somewhat smaller: 4 to 5 percent.) 

Why this growth? It was not, our authorities agree, for 
reasons that would seem self-evident to most modern 
missiologists. The early church did not have an organized 
missionary program. There was no sign, Lane Fox com¬ 
ments, “of a mission directed by church leaders ... we 
cannot name a single active Christian missionary between 
St. Paul and the age of Constantine” (Lane Fox 1986:282). 
Brox agrees that “there was no organization of mission” 
(1982:193). After the first generation, the church’s leaders 
were pastoring already existing churches, not founding 
new ones or winning new believers; and there were, of 
course, no mission boards! The growth of the early church 
was not planned; for all of the Christians’ active recruit¬ 
ment of new believers, it was as if by “accident” (Brox 
1982:224). 

Was this growth because the early Christians prayed 
and theologized about mission? Not so, Brox argues. The 
early believers rarely prayed for the conversion of non- 
Christians; he cites an article by Yves Congar, who has 
found only eight examples of such prayers in the entire 
Christian literature of the first three centuries (Brox 
1982:211-212). Similarly, the early church did not have a 
well-developed missionary theology. “Mission was not a 
theme in the surviving early sermons. The concern for 
mission, as well as the necessity of the conversion of 
non-Christians and the corresponding duty of Christians 
to participate in a general missionary duty, was almost 
never expressed” (Brox 1982:193-194). 

Themes dear to later Christians do not appear in the 
writings of the early believers. Jesus’ commission in Mat¬ 
thew 28:16-20 is never cited as a motive for mission. This 
commission, the early Christians contended, had already 
been fulfilled; it had been a task limited to the original 
apostles, which they had carried out by scattering system¬ 
atically across the world and founding churches. By doing 

33 



this, they had asserted Jesus’ lordship over every land and 
people; their missionary effort had been the central 
episode in “the world-historical drama of the proclamation 
of the gospel” (Brox 1982:206). Henceforth there would 
be no apostles (Ephesians 4:11 is superseded); instead 
there would be pastors and teachers, who would faithfully 
carry on the traditions of Christ Jesus as laid down by his 
monogenerational apostles. 

But growth of new believers and new congregations 
would continue. It would take place within the framework 
already established by the apostles. Until Christ returned, 
however, this growth would never be all-encompassing. 
In the meantime, as the church continued to be embattled 
in its struggle with the “world,” its members would give 
primary attention to their intramural life. 

If the primary focus of the pre-Constantinian Christians 
was thus directed inward, why the growth of their 
churches? Our authorities all agree in rejecting one reason 
and affirming another. 

The reason they reject is the pattern of public preaching 
recorded in the Acts of the Apostles. They would thus give 
little credence to Michael Green’s conviction that, despite 
the lack of evidence, “there can be no doubt that this 
open-air evangelism continued throughout the first two 
centuries” (Green 1970:157). In an empire in which 
Christianity was an officially proscribed superstitio, public 
preaching would court danger for preacher and audience 
alike. To be sure, there were, especially in the first two 
centuries, “charismatically inclined loners” who wandered 
from one community to another (Brox 1982:218). But 
these appear to have taught and missionized quietly, 
domestically. It is thus not surprising that the pagan 
Caecelius’ view of Christianity is that of a low-profile 
movement: “The Christians are a secret tribe that lurk in 
darkness and shun the light, silent in public, chattering in 
corners” (Minucius Felix 1931:8,4). 

“Chattering in corners”—this points to the reason which 
our authorities agree to affirm. Early Christians, following 
their trades around the empire, intermingled purposefully 
with their neighbors. Their lifestyle was one of “presence 
and conspicuousness” (Brox 1982:226). While at their 
jobs, they combined hard work with talking; in crowded 
urban tenement buildings they met others in the stairways. 
“Simply as neighbors, the Christians were naturally 
everywhere” (MacMullen 1984:42). Denied a place in the 
forum, the Christians were present in ordinary, workaday 
settings where their character and common life were 
evident to people who knew them and, on other grounds, 
trusted them. On this level, “it was simply not possible or 
necessary to conceal one’s prayers or worship of God from 
everyone’s eyes” (Lane Fox 1986:316). 

So what did the Christians have to offer their neighbors? 
At this point our authorities part company. Part of the 
fascination of MacMullen’s book is that he is so sure, so 
simple, so categorical in his analysis. Early Christian 
churches grew because the Christians, while wielding a 
stick, proffered a carrot. The Christian message was stark 
and unyielding. There is one God who will judge all 
people with severity and condemn to everlasting torment 
those who do not turn to him. But for those who, alarmed 
by this prospect, do repent, God will demonstrate his 
reality by works of supernatural power. Whether in heal¬ 
ing a diseased neighbor or cleansing a heathen shrine, 
God was a God of miracles. 

MacMullen recognizes that, in raising this subject, he is 
trespassing on “a historiographical 'no-go’ area” (1984:27). 

34 


But he insists that historians should reflect, not their own 
worldview, but the worldview of the people whom they 
are studying. “I report as faithfully as I can what people 
of that ancient time believed” (1984:24)—and not only of 
that time, but of many non-Enlightenment cultures 
throughout history. (In a significant aside, MacMullen sees 
parallels in the West African ministry of William Wade 
Harris [1984:23-24]). For example, exorcism was “possibly 
the most highly rated activity of the early Christian 
church.” And, when people joined the church, it was 
miracles which had been “the chief instrument of 
conversion” (1984:26-27). Other reasons—the message of 
Christians, their apologetic writings, their lifestyle, their 
martyrdoms—MacMullen deprecates. For him, the growth 
of the early church was a result of supernatural acts. 

What evidence does MacMullen have for his thesis? 
From the post-Constantinian period he cites examples— 
from Hilarion, Anthony, Martin—of “theological demon¬ 
strations.” Prior to Constantine, he notes that the church 
in Rome, which Lane Fox had used for statistical estimates, 
had among its 154 ministers no fewer than 52 exorcists. 
But his primary focus is Gregory, the mid-third century 


September 1990 Volume 18 Number 3 

MISSION [7k 

FOCUS W 

33 The Growth of the Early Church: Reflections on 
Recent Literature 
Alan Kreider 

36 Missionaries and Social Change 
Joseph Liechty 

39 How My Understanding of Mission Has Developed 
Henry J. Schmidt 

42 African Exhibit Indicts Canadian Missionaries for 
Arrogance 
William J. Samarin 

44 In review 
48 Editorial 


EDITORIAL COUNCIL 
Editor Wilbert R. Shenk 

Review editors Hans Kasdorf, Henry J. Schmidt 
Other members Peter M. Hamm, Robert L. Ramseyer 

Editorial assistant Betty Kelsey 


MISSION FOCUS (ISSN 0164-4696) is published quarterly at 500 
S. Main St., Elkhart, Indiana, by Mennonite Board of Missions. 
Single copies available without charge. Send correspondence to 
Box 370, Elkhart, IN 46515-0370. Second-class postage paid at 
Elkhart, Indiana, and at additional mailing offices. Lithographed in 
USA. Copyright 1990 by Mennonite Board of Missions. 
POSTMASTER: Send address changes to MISSION FOCUS, Box 
370, Elkhart, IN 46515-0370. 



bishop of Pontus in north-central Asia Minor. Between 
240 and 270 this pupil of Origen did his best to spread 
Christianity in this rough terrain. According to several 
accounts of his life, his ministry was marked by show¬ 
downs with local demons in which the Christian God was 
invariably victor. As a result, whereas when Gregory began 
his episcopate there were 17 Christians in Pontus, by the 
end there were 17 non-Christians! For subsequent gen¬ 
erations, Gregory of Pontus has thus come to be known 
as “the Wonder-Worker.” And MacMullen suspects, al¬ 
though surviving evidence is admittedly lacking, that 
there must have been comparable mass conversions else¬ 
where (1984:61). 

Brox, who doesn’t mention the miraculous dimension— 
and who, writing in German, is more up-to-date with 
continental than Anglo-Saxon scholarship—does not eval¬ 
uate MacMullen’s thesis. For him, Gregory is the excep¬ 
tion that proves his rule—“the exception in planned 
surface expansion” (Brox 1982:228). Lane Fox does grap¬ 
ple with MacMullen. Like MacMullen, he views Gregory 
of Nyssa’s Life of Gregory of a century later as over¬ 
elaborated hagiography. But he also rejects the substantial 
reliability of the Syriac account of Gregory’s life which is 
so central to MacMullen’s analysis (Ryssel n.d.). As often 
in ancient history, the scholarly debate turns on an 
evaluation of evidence. Is the Syriac Life a pre-Con- 
stantinian work which, despite “some nonsense,” is “oth¬ 
erwise acceptable on grounds of simplicity and logic” 
(MacMullen 1984:145)? Or is this work “a legendary 
panegyric, with its own touches of imaginary color” (Lane 
Fox 1986:760)? And, hovering over it all, there is the 
philosophical question—do miracles occur, and if so, how 
important are they? 

How do we adjudicate this dispute? My own sense, 
having read the German translation of the Syriac, is that 
many of the events described in it could have happened. 
And, with David Aune, I observe that “magic was a 
characteristic feature of early Christianity from its very 
inception” (Aune 1979:1557). 

But ultimately, I believe, MacMullen fails to convince 
because he pushes too hard. The exorcists in Rome, for 
example, were engaged in the repeated, routine exorcisms 
of baptismal candidates far more than in “power contests” 
with demons in the public domain. And elsewhere the 
slenderness of MacMullen’s evidence is apparent. As Lane 
Fox—who has rightly or wrongly discounted the Syriac 
Life of Gregory—states, between the apostolic age and 
Constantine “we know of no historical case when a miracle 
or an exorcism turned an individual, let alone a crowd, to 
the Christian faith” (1986:327). 

So MacMullen’s case, it seems to me, is stimulating but 
exaggerated. But while building on Brox and Lane Fox, 
we must acknowledge MacMullen’s contribution. Within 
a multifaceted framework of explanations of the early 
church’s growth, we can give miracle a genuine but 
subsidiary place. 

Why then did the early churches grow? In addition to 
those matters we have already discussed, Lane Fox and 
Brox offer us a final reason which has to do with the 
believers’ unique amalgam of message and lifestyle. The 
believers conveyed their message by many forms of 
persuasion. In major cities, Brox emphasizes, there were 
philosophical schools, in which Justin, Clement of Alex¬ 
andria, and others dealt with contemporary questions and 
thought patterns. There were also the writings of the 
apologists: Justin, Tertullian, Athenagoras, Origen, and the 


rest. To be sure, there were not many apologists; and, as 
Brox points out, they were at times lacking in argument 
and style. But at their best they advanced communicative 
statements of the Christian faith and hope. Lane Fox, 
whose knowledge of ancient literature is wide in scope, 
is impressed by the apologists. In the third century, for 
example, of all surviving literature, “in bulk detail the 
longest texts are written by Christians with a case to plead” 
(Lane Fox 1986:331,572). 

But vastly more typical than the philosophers or writers, 
and certainly more socially significant, were the humble 
Christians who, in household or workplace, gave witness 
to their faith. The pagan critic Celsus describes how they 
operated: “We see in private houses workers in wool and 
leather, and fullers, and persons of the most uninstructed 
and rustic character, not venturing to utter a word in the 
presence of their elders and wiser masters; but when they 
get hold of the children privately, and certain women as 
ignorant as themselves, they pour forth wonderful state¬ 
ments, to the effect that they ought not to give heed to 
their fathers and to their teachers, but should obey them 
... that they alone know how people ought to live, and 
that, if the children obey them, they will both be happy 
themselves, and will make their home happy also” (Origen 
1872:3,55). 

In this account, the centers of mission are humble—the 
inner part of the ancient house (“the women’s house”) or 
the workshop. The missioners, like their audiences, are 
working people. They are stating a view of religion and 
society that will be unacceptable to their social superiors. 
And this is important practically, for their “philosophy” 
impinges upon lifestyle—“they alone know how people 
ought to live.” In this text as elsewhere, it is marginal 
people—women and children—who are the primary re¬ 
cipients of this unsettling message. 

The Christians’ message was unsettling, because it came 
at a time when the empire’s order was beginning to 
crumble from within. By the third century the imperial 
coinage was being debased, order was breaking down, and 
society was becoming increasingly hierarchical, as the 
urban rich were being economically and legally distanced 
from the rest of society. Hopelessness was widespread, 
and the gods seemed powerless to address the crisis. In 
this setting the Christian message spoke a word of hope— 
for this world and beyond. “Among second-century au¬ 
thors,” Lane Fox observes, “it is the Christians who are 
the most confident and assured” (1986:331). 

The churches of the early centuries thus continued to 
engage themselves with the task that Wayne Meeks has 
found in the Pauline congregations—they “were engaged 
... in constructing a new world” (Meeks 1984:192). The 
Christian message involved more than propositions to 
affirm; it was an invitation to live in a new way, to 
participate in a new social reality which was both local 
and “catholic.” It took years of apprenticeship to become 
acculturated to the thought patterns and mores of this new 
community. Hence the lengthy periods of catechumenate 
which preceded Christian baptism (Lane Fox 1986:326). 
That candidates were willing to put up with this, and to 
endure the severe persecution that at times could break 
out, was a sign that in the churches they found a love 
which touched them in their motivational cores. 

As the third century progressed, gradual changes were 
taking place. In the Christian communities, numbers were 
increasing. Emphases were changing as well. There was 
an increasing tolerance for deviant behavior and an 

35 



increasing intolerance of deviant doctrine. At the same 
time as there were periodic, empire-wide bursts of intense 
persecution which often tore their communities apart, 
there was also a growing local tolerance for the Christians. 
Christians were settling down, relaxing. 

But nothing that the Christians had hitherto experi¬ 
enced prepared them for the jolt they received in A.D. 
312 when the Emperor-claimant, Constantine, embraced 
their faith and a year later legalized it. With the emperor 
as coreligionist, the Christian church entered a new era 
in its missionary history. Assisted by methods that Mac- 
Mullen, with typical vivacity, calls “flattery and battery” 
(1984:119), the church throughout the fourth century 
grew six-fold. Even so, over half of the empire s population 
remained outside the church. So, under Theodosius II and 
his successors, the violence of state and mob was directed 
against persistent pagans. The result was a Christianized 
society filled with “partial converts,” people who “made 
such adaptations as were really necessary and kept what 
they could” (MacMullen 1984:116-117). In this new era 
called “Christendom,” we have traveled far from the 
understandings and methods by which the early church 
grew. 

What is the relevance of this survey for us? It may, in 
part, be a reminder of the distantness of history. The 
phrase “the early church” trips seductively off our 
tongues. Looking at its reality more carefully—as we have 
begun to do here—makes us realize that in many ways we 
would not “restore it” even if we could! I personally find 
much to admire in the experience of the early Christians 
but also much that puzzles me and inspires further 
exploration. One such thing is the phenomenon, noted by 
both MacMullen and Lane Fox, of the early Christians’ 
“very unsteady focus on the role of Jesus” (MacMullen 
1984:20; Lane Fox, 1986:353). Other readers will note 
contemporary themes or approaches which are underde¬ 
veloped or missing altogether among the early Christians. 

There is much we can learn from the early Christians. 
From the other side of the gulf of Christendom—in which 
Christian missionary activity has been difficult—come 
hints of other understandings which can have relevance 
to our own time. Herbert Butterfield, the great Cambridge 
historian, was fascinated by our position at a point in 
history at which Christianity is no longer politically or 


culturally compulsory. This, he felt, was a moment not for 
mourning but for mission. “We are back,” he wrote, “for 
the first time in something like the earliest centuries of 
Christianity, and those early centuries afford some rele¬ 
vant clues to the kind of attitude to adopt” (Butterfield 
1949:135). 

So the early churches offer us not a cure-all but clues. 
May we listen discerningly, and act upon what we hear. 


References Cited 

Aune, David 

1979 “Magic in Early Christianity,” in Aufstieg und Niedergang der 
Romischen Welt , II, Prinzipat, 23/2, Berlin & New York: 
Walter de Gruyter, 1507-1557. 

Brox, Norbert 

1982 “Zur christlichen Mission in der Spatantike,” in Karl Kertelge, 
ed., Mission im Neuen Testament , Quaestiones Disputate, 93, 
Freiburg-im-Breisgau: Herder, 190-237. 

Butterfield, Herbert 

1949 Christianity and History, New York: Charles Scribner’s Sons. 

Green, Michael 

1970 Evangelism in the Early Church, London: Hodder and Stough¬ 
ton. 

Harnack, Adolf von 

1908 The Mission and Expansion of Christianity in the First Three 
Centuries, London: Williams and Norgate. 

Lane Fox, Robin 

1986 Pagans and Christians, New York: A. A. Knopf; paperback 
Harper & Row (1988); London: Penguin Books, 1988 (the 
version used in this article). 

MacMullen, Ramsay 

1984 Christianizing the Roman Empire (AD 100-400), New Haven: 
Yale University Press. 

Meeks, Wayne A. 

1984 The First Urban Christians: The Social World of the Apostle 
Paul, New Haven: Yale University Press. 

Minucius, Felix 

1931 Octavius, ed. G. H. Rendall, Loeb Classical Library, Harvard 
University Press. 

Origen 

1872 Contra Celsum, ed. A. Roberts and J. Donaldson, Ante-Nicene 
Christian Library, 23, Edinburgh: T & T Clark 

Ryssel, Victor 

n.d. Eine syrische Lebensgeschichte des Gregorius Thaumaturgus, 
Zurich: A. Bopp. 

Wilken, Robert L. 

1984 The Christians as the Romans Saw Them, New Haven: Yale 
University Press. 


Missionaries and Social Change 

JOSEPH LIECHTY 


During the first half of the nineteenth century, evangeli¬ 
cals led a “Protestant crusade” to convert Ireland’s major¬ 
ity Catholic population to Protestantism. The crusaders 
came to the task with varied motivations. The motives of 
some were simple and personal: transformed themselves 
by an experience of personal faith, they wanted to share 
this blessing with others. Other Protestants understood 
themselves as working for broader social goals: in an age 


Joseph Liechty and his wife, Linda, have served with Mennonite 
Board of Missions in Ireland since 1979. 

36 


when penal laws were no longer a tenable means of social 
control, they realized that “Protestant ascendancy” in 
Ireland could continue only if large numbers of Catholics 
became Protestants. But most Protestants seem to have 
been unaware of any possible contradiction. They be¬ 
lieved that all their goals for individuals and for society, 
spiritual and political, were entirely compatible. 

While this was a crusade that shed no blood, it did create 
bitter controversy. Catholics resented both the spiritual 
and the political intentions of Protestants, but especially 
the way the two were linked. “The Bible, without note or 



comment,” said one contemporary Catholic writer, “is not 
less a means of Protestant dominion than the Orange 
Yeoman s military array.” The low point of sectarian 
controversy came during a devastating famine (one mil¬ 
lion dead, one million emigrated) in the late 1840s, when 
Catholics accused some Protestant missionaries of 
“souperism”—distributing food, usually soup, to starving 
Catholics only on condition that they become Protestants 
or at least attend Bible classes. The crusade finally wound 
down in the 1860s when a census revealed that half a 
century of evangelistic effort, sectarian tension, social 
turmoil, and emigration had left the religious profile of 
Ireland essentially unaltered. 

But memories of the Protestant crusade live on. I 
recently attended a widely publicized book launch by a 
predominantly Catholic group which hopes to channel 
Catholic memories of the famine into greater worldwide 
effort toward preventing and relieving famines. So far so 
good, but in stimulating Catholic memories, are they 
prepared to deal with the sectarian resentments that lie 
just below the surface? I think not, so I have opened up 
dialogue with them about how these memories of souper¬ 
ism can be dealt with redemptively. The national radio 
network recently featured a controversy about a bitter 
attack on “born-again Christians” by a Catholic priest. As 
a result of the broadcast my co-worker, Mike Garde, who 
ministers to persons affected by marginal religious groups, 
spent much time on the phone answering questions from 
confused journalists, priests, and independent Bible 
church members. The high level of interest and passion 
makes no sense at all except for the lingering effects of 
the Protestant crusade. More than a century later, the 
legacy of Protestant missionary efforts is central in shaping 
Mennonite witness in Ireland! 

The story of the Protestant crusade and its enduring 
consequences is a sobering reminder of the complex 
relationship between missionaries and social change. Mis¬ 
sionaries are nothing if not change agents, and yet for 
various reasons we are frequently not conscious of this. A 
self-conscious identity as a change agent means thinking 
about the present in the light of the future; it means 
reflecting on the tension between what is and what might 
be. But busy lives, filled to the brim with the demands of 
the present, can sometimes leave little opening for the 
light of the future to shine in. Furthermore, our participa¬ 
tion in the modern hatred of imperialism and our appre¬ 
ciation for the integrity of human culture leave us 
suspicious of the very idea of promoting change in another 
society. This pop anthropology, coupled with our aware¬ 
ness of how missionaries have sometimes abused their role 
as change agents, brings ambivalence about our role in 
bringing about change—we may prefer to avoid giving 
this topic much deliberate attention. 

Ambivalence is undoubtedly a healthy mind-set to 
inform the task of bringing about change. But the funda¬ 
mental fact remains that if we are doing our job, we are 
change agents. We may not be comfortable with this, we 
may not even be aware of it, but we cannot escape it. The 
most low-key, culture-sensitive, self-critical missionary 
stance conceivable still contains within it a change-creat¬ 
ing impulse. Just as inescapable, as change agents we will 
work with a strategy. We are creatures of habit and 
pattern, and that pattern reveals the outline of our strat¬ 
egy. Strategies may be intentional or unintentional, coher¬ 
ent or incoherent, conscious or unconscious, explicit or 
implicit, but we always have a strategy. If by definition 


change agents must have a strategy, we profit by facing 
this directly and by devoting time and attention to clari¬ 
fying what goals we work toward and the strategies by 
which we mean to achieve them. 

One necessary starting point is understanding how the 
process of change works. The ideas that follow are some 
that I have developed or borrowed, principally through 
the study of history. The subject of change is infinitely 
complex and subtle, and every assertion can be qualified 
into oblivion, but I hope these few simple points might be 
helpful. 

1. There is no such thing as rapid radical change. All 

change is relatively slow and evolutionary, proceeding by 
small increments, because the past carries a huge force of 
inertia. If change has been rapid, then it only appears to 
be radical, because the weight of the past cannot be held 
off forever, and the apparently radical change will collapse 
or succumb to a backlash. If change has been genuinely 
radical, then it only appears to be rapid, and careful 
examination of the change will reveal that it was a long 
time in the making, and perhaps that those who brought 
about the change build on hidden roots in surprising and 
creative ways. Revolutions often reveal vividly this dy¬ 
namic of change. Many times, when the dust has settled 
and the blood has stopped flowing, enormous energy, vast 
suffering, and fantastic rhetoric will produce no more than 
a change of regime. Even the most rigorous and brutal 
efforts cannot guarantee change. Religion and ethnicity 
were subjected to devastating attacks after the Bolshevik 
Revolution, and yet with every passing day we seem to 
find out more about how both remain vital, even explosive, 
forces in the USSR. Although the staggering recent events 
in eastern Europe might appear superficially to be exam¬ 
ples of rapid radical change, they are in fact the opposite. 
Revolutionary societies were going to sweep away the 
past, start over, create a New Man; but now these efforts 
are crumbling, and in the rubble we find the old problems 
reasserting themselves and demanding attention once 
again. When a revolution is successful and to some extent 
radical, it will be so because it took the time to bring along 
the whole people (or at least a majority), and it will have 
built on the roots of the previous society. Social change is 
a slow and complex process, and we must not be fooled, 
seduced, or detracted by the lure of rapid change. 

2. We control change only to a very limited extent. 
Because the momentum of the past is so great and the 
dynamics of change are so complicated, we cannot nec¬ 
essarily engineer even relatively simple and straightfor¬ 
ward changes, and results become even more difficult to 
calculate if the desired changes are radical and complex. 
Sometimes, in fact, our efforts may produce results nearly 
opposite what we intended. I am reminded of those early 
nineteenth-century Irish Protestants who circulated the 
Bible among Irish Catholic peasants, confident that it must 
have a pacifying political effect, only to find that the 
peasants were quite capable of searching the Scripture for 
apocalyptic passages supporting their popular prophecies 
about the imminent demise of Protestantism. And I think 
of missionaries who have devoted great care and effort to 
introducing the gospel to traditional or primal cultures, 
only to find that their efforts are overtaken by, or even 
contribute to, forces of modernization that destroy the 
culture they wanted to serve. 

3. The slowness of change and the difficulty of con¬ 
trolling it have basic implications for our strategies. In 
the first place, if the change we seek is at all substantial, 

37 


we had better be prepared for the long haul. Having made 
that commitment, we are confronted with a paradox: on 
the one hand, we must develop our strategies for change 
with all the care, wisdom, and sophistication we can 
muster, so that we take into account as many factors as 
possible; on the other hand, having worked hard to 
develop our strategies, we must not take them too seri¬ 
ously, because we cannot possibly take everything into 
account, and therefore our strategies may not serve the 
ends we desire. Holding these attitudes together is ex¬ 
tremely difficult—we are likely to become quite attached 
to the strategies in which we invested so much effort—but 
it must be done, because our attachment can work against 
our goals. To avoid the trap of idolatrous infatuation with 
particular strategies, we must realize that every long-term 
plan can only be provisional. The idea that we can attain 
a distant end through a complex series of steps is an 
extremely dangerous illusion. Therefore, while keeping 
distant goals in mind, we must be comfortable taking small 
and relatively calculable steps, and we must be satisfied 
that the next small step we take has integrity in and of 
itself, that ends and means are in perfect harmony. Then 
we must continually reevaluate our strategies. Is our goal 
still the same? Has the situation changed so that our 
strategy needs to be altered? Patience and flexibility are 
essential qualities in those who seek change. 

4. The raw material a change agent works with is the 
present. But we will only understand the present in a 
superficial and probably deceptive way unless we know 
the course by which the present came to be. Therefore, 
because knowledge of the past is our most basic tool for 
understanding the present, every missionary must pay 
attention to history. Granted, I come with a particular bias 
on this point, having spent several years working for a 
Ph.D. in Irish history as a way of strengthening Mennonite 
witness in Ireland. During the course of my studies I 
occasionally asked myself, can I justify my studies to MBM, 
MCC, and the Mennonite church? However, having 
finished the degree and begun applying what I learned, 
I am inclined to reverse the question: Could the Menno¬ 
nite church justify witness in Ireland without having 
someone study Irish history? No, I am not suggesting that 
every missionary needs a Ph.D. in history. There are many 
good ways (including nonacademic ways) of gaining a 
grasp of the past, and furthermore some people can do 
this work on behalf of others. But by whatever means 
acquired, a sense of the past is essential to missionary 
work. 


5. However, not just any sense of the past will serve 
missionary purposes. Attitudes toward the past run along 
a continuum between ignoring the past and worshiping 
it. Ignoring the past is obviously foolish, because it will 
lead to shallow analysis and ill-conceived change. But a 
reactionary reverence for the past is an equally dangerous 
attitude with many adherents. Especially in times of great 
social tension, false prophets appear who are so overcome 
by the problems of society that they can do no more than 
shout, “Stop and return to the old ways!” But even if some 
past situation were genuinely more desirable than the 
present, the huge momentum of the past works against 
returning as surely as it does against radical change. In 
fact, advocates of reactionary reverence for the past and 
advocates of rapid, radical change are working with 
essentially the same dangerously ahistorical assumptions, 
however different their goals. What missionaries require 
is a stance of creative transformation, which will look to 
the future without ignoring the past, and look to the past 
without being bound by it. In this we have no better model 
than Jesus, who came to fulfill the law, not abolish it, but 
whose creative transformations of Jewish tradition were 
so surprising that many of those who believed they were 
friends of the law took Jesus to be an enemy of the law. 

Even so brief a discussion of the nature of change carries 
with it some obvious demands on those who would 
promote change. To be a change agent is an awesome and 
humbling task. “Nothing is worth doing which can be 
achieved in our lifetime, therefore we must be saved by 
hope,” said Reinhold Niebuhr. “Nothing which is true or 
beautiful or good makes complete sense in any immediate 
context of history: therefore we must be saved by faith” 
(1952:63). These are words every missionary should re¬ 
member. Our capacity for self-deception is so great, the 
possibilities for being overwhelmed or co-opted by other 
forces are so vast, and the process of change is so complex 
and subtle, that unless we approach our work utterly 
without triumphalism, with hope and with patience, in 
prayer and in faith, we may very well do more harm than 
good. It is our responsibility to be aware of the nature of 
change, informed by a sense of the past, and armed with 
thoughtful strategies. But the journey that must begin with 
the very best work we can offer must end in faith that 
God will use it for his purposes. 

Reference Cited 

Niebuhr, Reinhold 

1952 The Irony of American History, New York: Charles Scribners. 


38 


How My Understanding of Mission Has Developed 

HENRY J. SCHMIDT 


My initial interest in mission was fostered in our home, 
which was the “watering hole” for many missionaries and 
itinerant preachers who came to minister in our small, 
rural church. During my childhood years I recall fearing 
that if I really surrendered myself to God, he would send 
me to Africa. Although my understanding of mission was 
limited, I was sure that Africa was not my preference. 
Several years of Bible Institute and a particular recommit¬ 
ment experience at age 18 forced me to rethink my 
concept of God and of his mission in the world. I began 
to understand the depth of God’s love, God’s concern for 
the reconciliation of all people to himself through Christ, 
and God’s mission of sharing that good news through a 
transformed church, and was ready to become involved 
in God’s global concern. God, I realized, does not punish 
obedience, and mission has little to do with location or 
vocation but everything to do with obedience. To be what 
God calls and gifts one to be obviously has a price, but it 
is more a privilege than a sacrifice. The motto of my life 
became focused: “The will of God: nothing more, nothing 
less, and nothing else.” 

Over the years my interest in mission intensified but the 
exact expression of that commitment has been full of 
surprises. My wife and I declared our willingness to serve 
overseas and were prepared to go to India in 1964, but 
circumstances closed that door. Our commitment to mis¬ 
sion has subsequently expressed itself in pastoring, church 
planting, itinerant evangelist work, mission conferences, 
and evangelism seminars in North America. International 
mission work has included short-term preaching/teach- 
ing/study assignments on all continents. For the past 
fifteen years I have been teaching mission and training 
pastors/missionaries at our denominational seminary—an 
assignment I had never considered in planning my career. 
My understanding of mission in the world has emerged 
in the context of struggle, study, global exposure, ministry 
experience, and the patient tutelage of godly teachers. 

Finding the centerpiece of God's mission 

Over the years my mission theology is increasingly rooted 
in God-consciousness, God-centeredness, and God-sent- 
ness. Earlier concepts of mission focused around the 
people’s lostness, the desperate human dilemma, and a 
sense of obligation to share good news with people. While 
I still affirm these, the most dynamic mission is motivated 
by a God-centered perspective which grows out of a 
relationship with a sending God. It is God who made the 
first move in creation (Gen. 1) and in our redemption by 
sending Jesus Christ (John 3:16). It is God who sends us 
into the world as he sent his own Son (John 20:21). It is 
God who empowers us with his authority in mission (Matt. 
28:18-20). The greatest motivation in mission comes from 
a Trinitarian focus; a God-centered initiative, a Christ-cen¬ 
tered message, and the Holy Spirit’s empowerment. This 
does not downplay the lostness or desperate plight of 
humanity—it focuses the centerpiece of our mission. 


Henry J. Schmidt is associate professor of World Mission and 
director for the Center for Training in Mission/Evangelism at the 
Mennonite Brethren Biblical Seminary , Fresno , California. 


Discovering the centrality of the church in mission 

My earlier orientation in evangelical Christianity placed 
a lot of emphasis on personal conversion and evangelism 
but didn’t always relate them strongly to the church. Early 
theological training tended to stress mission as personal 
evangelism, winning individuals, and sharing good news— 
often apart from the establishment of churches and the 
corporate mission responsibility. In seminary my theology 
of church was revamped. I realized that the church was 
not peripheral but central to God’s mission in the world. 
The Pauline pattern of emphasizing personal conversion 
(moral change) and of establishing local congregations 
(for Christian nurture and mission), places evangelism at 
the heart of the church’s mission. While I gratefully 
acknowledge the strength of para-church organizations in 
their clear evangelistic zeal and focus, I struggle with their 
theology of the church. 

My conversion to the centrality of the church in mission 
had several personal implications. As a pastor and itinerant 
evangelist I began to have second thoughts about estab¬ 
lishing my own interdenominational evangelistic organi¬ 
zation. I chose rather to function in an evangelism ministry 
that was anchored within a local church, a denomination, 
and in the seminary community. Furthermore, my gradu¬ 
ate program at the University of Southern California 
forced me to reevaluate my commitment to the church. I 
was suddenly faced with a host of people who believed 
in the church as strongly as I did, but for different reasons. 
They viewed the church as crucial without characterizing 
it as having a divine mandate, a supernatural character, or 
a strong sense of mission. To them the church was 
significant because of its historic role in shaping social 
ethics through biblical interpretation and its present 
function of socializing people into a community. While I 
had no quarrel with the church being a sociological or 
hermeneutical community, my theology of church focused 
its origin, character, and mission beyond those human 
categories. 

Focusing mission vision through spiritual renewal 

From my early ministry I have been concerned with 
spiritual renewal in the church and its implications for 
mission vision. The evidences of institutionalization and 
routinization in the church are all too evident. The fact 
that North America has 350,000 churches, 80-85 percent 
of which have plateaued or are declining in attendance, 
is one indicator of institutionalization. The fact that those 
same churches experienced their most significant growth 
in the first ten years of history, and that most never exceed 
their membership size at the fifteenth year, speaks of a 
loss of mission vision and momentum. 

In his article, Church Renewal That Lasts , Howard 
Snyder suggests that renewal must be personal and cor¬ 
porate to be genuine, structural and ideological to be 
ongoing, and missional in focus to be long lasting (Snyder 
1984). My earlier understanding of mission assumed the 
priority of the first two, with an almost exclusive emphasis 
on the pietistic, spiritual, and personal dimensions of 
renewal. Such renewal, however, was short-lived. I do not 
question the genuineness of personal and corporate re¬ 
newal, but I have come to see that if ideas, structures, and 

39 





mission vision in the church are not affected, genuine 
renewal is aborted. The “principalities and powers’’ which 
Paul addresses in Ephesians are not only present in the 
unjust social structures and political regimes in society, 
they also keep the church in captivity. 

I concur with Ray Bakke’s observation, based on his 
study of eighty world-class cities, that the primary reasons 
for urban churches’ ineffectiveness are internal—lack of 
sensitivity to need, vision, and structures, focus on main¬ 
tenance over mission, inflexibility—rather than external— 
unresponsiveness of people, resistance to the gospel. “We 
never did it this way before’’ are the seven last words of 
too many churches who won’t pay the price of ongoing 
and long lasting renewal. 

Combining evangelistic zeal with a social conscience 

My earlier itinerant ministry reflected a strong evangelis¬ 
tic zeal and a concern for personal conversion. It was 
based on several faulty assumptions. I viewed sin primarily 
as personal and individual, not corporate and structural. I 
was convinced that if people got right with God they 
would “do justly, seek mercy, and walk humbly before the 
Lord their God’’ (Mic. 6:8). I focused the task of the 
church on bringing people good news and helping them 
spiritually rather than on ministering to their physical 
needs. Time and exposure have helped me see the depth 
of sin both in individuals and in social structures. I found 
that the converted don’t automatically have a social 
conscience and the “trickle-down theory’’ doesn’t work 
any better in the church than it does in economics. 

The bedrock of my mission theology remains un¬ 
changed, namely, that spiritual change and personal con¬ 
version are fundamental to structural and social change. 
However, my study of Scripture, urban sociology, and the 
growth of global poverty forced me to rethink the dichot¬ 
omies between evangelism and social action; spiritual and 
physical need; word and deed. My middle-class, North 
American assumptions that education, proper health facil¬ 
ities, adequate housing, good employment, and reliable 
transportation existed for all were challenged by the 
world’s two billion people living in poverty. A holistic 
ministry emphasis in evangelism and church planting is 
not optional to mission in the world. Viv Grigg’s charge 
that “the church has given the poor bread and kept the 
bread of life for the middle class” (Grigg 1987:17) calls 
for the church to commit itself intentionally to gospel 
proclamation and demonstration, and to establishing com¬ 
munities of hope among the marginalized in the world. It 
will take a new breed of missionaries who will take the 
vow of poverty, chastity, and obedience to build churches 
among the poor. 

Reprioritizing mission in view of globalization/urbaniza¬ 
tion 

With my small, rural, family-oriented church background, 
ministry in the city represented a new frontier in mission. 
The pluralism, diversity, mobility, rapid change, secular¬ 
ization, and schedules of the city challenge the church’s 
role as the “hub” of community life in a way I was not 
accustomed to from my rural past. Although my commit¬ 
ment to mission was strong, my vision and view of cities 
and urban churches needed drastic revision. I needed to 
be converted from my negative perspective of the city as 
evil—i.e., dirty, depraved, and deprived—to see it as a 
place of unprecedented opportunity for mission. I had to 
acknowledge that rural churches which were built on the 
40 


values of status quo, sameness, smallness, stability, and 
harmony would look different than urban churches which 
are characterized more by change, diversity, conflict-man¬ 
agement, bigness, and mobility. The point is not that one 
is good and the other is bad; they are different, and each 
requires its own strategy. The issue is not personal pref¬ 
erence but effectiveness and contextual compatibility. 

In his providence God is allowing this generation to be 
a part of three major sociological movements which affect 
our mission: 

1. The urbanization of the world. Currently 42 percent 
of the world’s five billion people live in cities. It is 
projected that by 2025 the number will increase to 55 
percent and half of these will live in poverty. 

2. The Asianization of the world. Today one out of every 
two people born is Asian. 

3. The internationalization of the world. Every city of the 
world is a cosmopolitan mix of different people and 
language groups, be it the 125 language groups in the Los 
Angeles school system, the one million Japanese in Sao 
Paulo, or the Algerians who comprise 12 percent of the 
total population of Paris. 

These factors have major implications for mission strat¬ 
egy. First, it means that this is God’s hour in the city. In 
the midst of mobility, social upheaval, and massive urban 
migrations people are more open to the gospel. Our 
mission must focus on the city because that is where the 
people are. Second, our mission will have to take more 
seriously the unreached people groups in North America. 
The old dichotomies of “home” and “foreign” mission 
must cease. Historically, our denomination has mission- 
ized best overseas and among religious and cultural groups 
with whom we had some affinity—i.e., German Menno- 
nites, Lutherans, Baptists. Until the 1970s we gave little 
priority to ministry to other near neighbor ethnic groups. 
Our commitment to mission must place priority on the 
mission field at our doorstep—the 200 language groups in 
North America who will not be reached with English as 
the primary language, the international students, and the 
new arrivals to our shores—including the ten million 
Chinese anticipated after 1997. 

Developing mission partnerships in view of a shifting 
center 

As a part of the Western church, which has been on the 
forefront of mission sending for the past century, it has 
been hard for me to face the fact that the center of gravity 
in mission is also shifting. The decline of the West as a 
primary economic and political player on the world scene 
and the rapid growth of the church in the two-thirds world 
changes one’s perspective on mission. For nineteen cen¬ 
turies following the resurrection of Jesus Christ, Christi¬ 
anity grew to embrace one-third of all humanity—yet 
more than 80 percent of these were white in 1900. The 
year 1980 was a watershed for evangelicals, because for 
the first time the percentage of evangelicals in the 
two-thirds world came to equal the number in the West. 
Within five years, the percentage changed to 66 percent 
in the two-thirds world and 34 percent in the West. 

This shift in the center of gravity calls for a new 
partnership and empowerment in mission. It will test the 
mission motivation, commitment, and perspective of the 
Western church in an unprecedented way. It calls the 
Western church to be a partner in mission from a minority 
people and mission force perspective. Already two-thirds 
world Christians outnumber those in the Western church 



and by 2000 their mission agencies and missionaries will 
exceed ours. Even though the West may still be a domi¬ 
nant economic force in world mission it raises many 
questions about how we view partnership. Will Western 
dollars support only Western missionaries? Will we sup¬ 
port financially only what we control? Do missionized 
people and national conferences relate to the Western 
church on an indigenous basis or through our mission 
boards? Does partnership mean working together in 
global tasks through empowerment that comes from inter¬ 
national teams, boards, and cooperation? Must the next 
phase of global mission not assume that the gospel will be 
carried by culturally blended mission teams, with West¬ 
erners in the minority? 

Understanding spiritual warfare and empowerment in 
mission 

While I have always believed that the Holy Spirit s 
empowerment for mission was crucial for effectiveness, 
until recently the issue was a more academic and less 
practical reality. My earlier dispensational theology 
tended to reinforce a more conservative stance toward 
the Spirit s role in gifting, releasing, and empowering 
people for ministry. In the past decade I have concluded 
that among Western Christians, too many are “living on 
the right side of Calvary but the wrong side of Pentecost.” 
The issue is not one of preoccupation with the sign gifts, 
miracles, dramatic healings, or the doctrine of the Holy 
Spirit as an end in itself. It is an issue of spiritual 
preparation and empowerment for spiritual warfare. 

My recent trip to Latin America brought me face to face 
with the reality that the fastest growing churches in Sao 
Paulo, Bogota, and Guadalajara are independent charis¬ 
matic congregations. In Latin America the church is 
growing three times faster than the population. When I 
probed for reasons behind the growth of the independent, 
charismatic churches over other equally fundamental, 
evangelical mission agencies I was told, “The evangelicals 
believe in the Holy Spirit as a doctrine, but Pentecostals 
encounter the Holy Spirit as reality in their daily experi¬ 
ence.” Spiritist centers outnumber evangelical churches 
among Sao Paulo’s seventeen million people by a ratio of 
five to one. The only hope for breaking this stronghold is 
the Spirit’s empowerment for deliverance. For me it is no 
surprise that a more charismatically oriented theology and 
worship style attracts Brazilians. Brazilians are warm, 
emotive, expressive, and relational; their natural affinity is 
toward a charismatic theology and expression. Addition¬ 
ally, spiritism and the supernatural are a part of Brazilian 
culture and thinking. Since they connect day-to-day hap¬ 
penings with the miraculous and the supernatural in a 
spiritist culture, they also look for supernatural manifesta¬ 
tions of God’s power in Christianity. 

In an interview with three Catholic priests in a base 
community, I asked what the charismatic renewal move¬ 
ment had done in the Roman Catholic Church. Their 
response was candid, “It has freed the church to become 
more Brazilian in showing warmth and emotion in our 
worship. It has brought new life and vitality to the church 
by emphasizing a greater openness to the gifts beyond the 
seven sacraments. It has brought a strong evangelization 
emphasis into the Catholic Church.” 

Obviously the Spirit does not only empower for mission. 
The Spirit gives the gifts of wisdom and discernment so 
that in the exercise of all gifts the church is edified, Christ 
is exalted, and the kingdom is extended. My point is that 


mission in North America and in other parts of the world 
has not taken seriously enough the role of the Holy Spirit 
for empowerment. I have much to learn about the Spirit’s 
role in intercession, spiritual warfare, and healing. The key 
lies in a greater openness to and expectancy of the Spirit’s 
manifestation in ministry. 

Leadership development as a priority in mission 

There were basically two reasons for my shift from being 
a full-time itinerant evangelist and part-time teacher to a 
reversal of those roles in the mid-70s. First was a growing 
recognition that mass evangelism as a primary strategy in 
North America was ineffective in reaching and incorpo¬ 
rating new people into the church. Second was the 
realization that I needed to impact pastors and church 
leaders if the church was to be mobilized in mission. D. 
L. Moody said, “It is better to train ten people than to do 
the work of ten people.” My singular focus at seminary 
has been to develop leaders with a heart for evangelism, 
a vision for mission, and a multiplication mind-set. 

Over the years I have come to realize that church 
planting is the single most effective evangelistic strategy. 
The reasons are not difficult to discern. First, new 
churches start with a clear vision and commitment to 
reach new people. Second, statistical evidence for the 
ratio of conversions to membership is on the side of 
churches less than five years old rather than older estab¬ 
lished churches. Furthermore, new churches are usually 
more flexible, creative, and mobile in how they do church 
planting, and therefore reach population segments not 
being attracted by existing congregations. However, 
church planting without leadership development that is 
culturally indigenous will short-circuit church growth and 
multiplication. Perhaps the greatest contribution North 
Americans can make to the mushrooming two-thirds world 
church is to help with leadership training and develop¬ 
ment. 

Training for mission that is life and ministry related 

If the primary role of North American missionaries is not 
only to plant churches but to serve as catalytic leaders and 
equippers of national workers, then our training institu¬ 
tions and models will also have to change. Since mission 
in the next decades will be more cross-cultural on every 
continent, then training must incorporate not only the 
Western, philosophical, rational, and theoretical base, but 
it must educate leaders in a life, ministry, and experiential 
base. Training must be formation, not only information. 
While all missionaries may not be seminary-trained, they 
must develop skills in personal formation, evangelism, 
church planting, discipling, holistic ministries, and cross- 
cultural communication. However, regardless of formal 
education, overseas mission ministry should be based on 
cross-cultural and leadership development experience in 
their sending church context. Missionaries cannot be 
expected to do overseas what they have not demonstrated, 
modeled, experienced, and tested at the sending base. 
Furthermore, if two billion people are unreached and 
unreachable through conventional missionaries, then we 
will need to train a whole new mission force that pene¬ 
trates other countries, cultures, and religions through 
professional and more informal channels. 

Developing diverse and flexible mission strategies 

It has been suggested that the dual temptation of the 
church in every generation is “to change its message or 

41 


to refuse to change its methods.” With the shift from rural 
to urban and the breakdown of the “home” and “foreign” 
mission dichotomies, strategies must also change. It takes 
many different kinds of churches to reach different kinds 
of people. Good news must be contextualized in culturally 
appropriate ways to reach different peoples, even in the 
same city. Craig Ellison’s call for greater flexibility on how 
we “do church” in the city is timely: “Our ministries will 
be ineffective if we cherish racial/ethnic composition, our 
order of worship, our meeting schedules, our style of music 
and preaching more than those who need the Savior but 
are kept out of the kingdom because we are unwilling to 
make changes that would draw them to Christ” (Ellison 
1985:17). The church does not lack for opportunity in 
mission but it struggles with changing strategies to meet 
changing needs. There are at least four neglected people 
groups that will not be reached through traditional church 
styles and strategies: the different ethnic/cultural/lan¬ 


guage peoples; the poor and marginalized; the multifamily 
housing unit dwellers (condominiums, high-rises, govern¬ 
ment housing projects); and the “baby boomers” (people 
born between 1946 and 1964). Mission strategies in the 
next decades cannot be standardized and applied unilat¬ 
erally. They will have to become more diverse and more 
focused on specific people groups if the church is “to win 
as many as possible” (1 Cor. 9:19). 


References Cited 

Ellison, Craig 

1985 “Attitudes and Urban Transition,” Urban Mission (Vol. 2, No. 
3), 14-26. 

Grigg, Viv 

1987 “Sorry the Frontier Moved,” Urban Mission (Vol. 4, No. 4), 
12-25. 

Snyder, Howard 

1984 “Renewal That Lasts,” Leadership (Vol. 5. No. 3), 90-93. 


African Exhibit Indicts Canadian Missionaries for Arrogance 

WILLIAM J. SAMARIN 


The following article responds to an exhibition that has 
attracted considerable attention. It highlights the continu¬ 
ing tendentious treatment accorded missions in the public 
forum. In February and March 1990 the British Broadcast¬ 
ing Corporation televised a six-part series, “ Missionaries , ” 
and published an illustrated book containing the complete 
text of the broadcast. It , too , was marked by an air of 
cynicism and condescension while telling the story in a 
highly selective manner. Reprinted by permission from 
Christian Week, Winnipeg, Manitoba. 

While coalitions of persons of African ancestry have 
been demonstrating at the ROM (Royal Ontario Museum) 
in Toronto over what they consider the racist nature of 
the exhibit, “Into the Heart of Africa,” Christians and 
missionary societies have been silent. 

Many would be justified in being offended at the 
characterization of Canadian missionary work in Africa in 
the 19th and early 20th centuries. 

The exhibit, which opened last November and continues 
until early August, claims to “celebrate the rich cultural 
heritage of African life,” while asserting that Canadians in 
Africa misunderstood and denigrated African culture and 
African worldviews. 

Missionaries are the chief objects of criticism, de¬ 
nounced for their “paternalism and cultural arrogance.” 
Many of the objects on display were donations by mission¬ 
aries and missionary societies serving in Nigeria, Zaire, 
and Angola, such as Thomas Titcombe, Joseph Blakeney, 
and Walter T. Currie. The focus is entirely on Protestants. 

Overblown 

These artifacts, curator Jeanne Cannizzo claims, “often 
reveal almost as much about the missionary worldview as 

Dr. William J. Samarin, professor of Linguistic Anthropology at 
the University of Toronto, is author of The Black Mans Burden: 
African Colonial Labor on the Congo and Ubangi Rivers 1880- 
1900 (1989). 

42 


they do about African beliefs and cultural practices”—an 
overblown statement unless it means only that Protestants 
believed that Africans lived in paganism from which they 
had to be saved. 

Although conversion to Christianity is recognized as the 
chief goal of missionary work, it also sought, the exhibit 
claims, to civilize Africans by replacing their traditional 
customs and material culture with European ones, like 
eating with fork and spoon and living in square houses. 
Missionaries were motivated by a “sense of cultural supe¬ 
riority.” 

The exhibit, poorly documented from missionary publi¬ 
cations and archives, is specious for its stereotypical view 
of Christian missions, and it is guilty of making wrong 
interpretations, blatant contradictions, and frequent spec¬ 
ulations in support of its propaganda. 

A photograph of a group of women at Chisamba, Angola, 
in 1895, shows some of them in the “sort of dress preferred 
by missionaries” although European cloth was a trade item 
that, Africans were enthusiastic about, and the blouse that 
only one woman wears above a wrap-around skirt in the 
native manner might have been a gift in payment for food 
brought by the woman. 

The caption also claims that Africans were taught to 
cultivate bananas, as if they had known nothing about this 
staple. Even if bananas were new to the area, they may 
have been introduced to the mission village to improve 
the people’s diet. 

Square houses and outdoor hearths, it goes on to say, 
“might be further ‘improvements’ suggested by Canadian 
missionaries,” ignoring the fact that cooking outdoors was 
traditional before Europeans arrived and Angola had been 
colonized by the Portuguese since the 15th century. 

A photograph of Mrs. Thomas Titcombe “offering ‘a 
lesson in how to wash clothes’ to Yagba women in northern 
Nigeria about 1915,” implies that African women had to 
be taught cleanliness, and ignores the possibility that these 
were mission station employees, part or full time, who 


were being taught to do the task in a certain manner. Soap 
was probably introduced to Africa by the Portuguese at 
the same time that European fabrics were. 

Kinship ties 

Changes supposedly introduced by missionaries are de¬ 
scribed as ‘‘profoundly disruptive,” such as the houses that 
were meant for nuclear families, in spite of the fact that 
it was the Portuguese who encouraged the construction 
of such houses by not taxing them, as they did the 
traditional kind of African dwelling. 

If the missionaries had anything to do with guiding the 
members of the mission community, they were undoubt¬ 
edly helping the people to avoid the repressive ordinances 
issued by the colonial government. 

In any case, anybody with any experience in Africa 
knows that African family life, with differences between 
rural and urban settings, still depends on the kinship 
system. 

While the exhibit depicts missionaries as arrogant colo¬ 
nialists, interested in portraying Africans in the worst 
possible light, so as to raise funds for their missions, the 
curator, whom one journalist has called an anthropologist, 
seems puzzled by the beautiful objects that missionaries 
also brought back. Rev. Currie collected dozens of beau¬ 
tiful baskets and both combs and hairpins of fine crafts¬ 
manship and design, and Rev. T. Hope Morgan brought 
back exquisite Kuba textiles. 

Curator Cannizzo ignores the fact that Canadian mis¬ 
sionaries were quite as capable as others of appreciating 
indigenous art. 

Although slave shackles and whips are displayed, little 
is made of the role that missionaries played in abolishing 
slavery. Indeed, rather than commending missionaries for 
their humanitarianism, they are said to have sought an end 
to the slave trade only to replace it with “legitimate 
commerce.” 

Missionaries in the first decade of this century contrib¬ 
uted greatly to the condemnation of the barbarous treat¬ 
ment of Africans in the Congo Free State where they were 
forced to collect wild rubber, as archives of the Baptist 
Historical Society in Rochester, New York, make clear for 
what is now Zaire. 

Uninformed and biased 

So naive, uninformed, and biased is the exhibit that in 
commenting on the weapons in the exhibit (spears, throw¬ 
ing knives, and the like), it depicts Africans as having been 
relatively unwarlike and non-expansionist. It portrays a 
romantic Africa, where pastoralists defended their herds 
from human and animal predators and farmers protected 
the family fields. 

Nineteenth century accounts of central Africa report 
raids and skirmishes of terrible savagery, when bodies 
would be mutilated. (They lived, of course, before the wars 
that ‘civilized’ human beings conducted in this century, 
equally, if not more, savage.) 

It was generally believed, by Europeans (although I 


have yet to find a Protestant missionary sharing this view) 
that Africans indulged in cannibalism, although the extent 
of it and the reasons for it, if true at all, are matters that 
scholars are still debating. 

Missionaries, as all human beings, are not entirely free 
of the worldviews that characterize their societies and 
cultures. For that reason they have made mistakes. In the 
15th and 16th centuries the Portuguese brought African 
slaves to Portugal sincerely believing in some cases that 
they were assuring them of a better life and a better future 
life as Christians. 

Many missionaries in recent years, both Catholic and 
Protestant, have been very much aware of the possible 
consequences of the work they undertake. They have 
sought to minimize the far-reaching effects of cultural 
change, and tried to protect, as much as anthropologists 
try to, from exploitation by powerful landowners. 

Missionaries have not always and everywhere obliged 
people to wear more clothing. Jack E. Phillips, director of 
SIM (formerly Sudan Interior Mission, founded in Can¬ 
ada), a missionary for 20 years in Nigeria, says that it was 
Nigerian Christians who insisted that Christians dress up, 
criticizing missionaries for keeping their people in a 
“backward,” that is, non-European, state. 

One group of missionaries in Chad, while insisting, on 
doctrinal grounds, that women cover their heads in church 
(which they did with a gourd), allowed both men and 
women to come stark naked, as was their habit at that 
time. 

Low esteem 

There is no doubt that throughout the history of the West, 
people of other lands, once called “primitives,” were held 
in low esteem. A feeling of cultural superiority is, of course, 
not limited to Christians. 

By the time the exhibit leaves Toronto, at least 40,000 
people will have viewed the objects, read the comments 
and possibly bought the catalog. This unbalanced exhibit, 
which is an injustice to the missionaries who gave the 
objects in good faith, will be seen next at the Canadian 
Museum of Civilization (Ottawa-Hull), the Vancouver 
Museum, the Natural History Museum of Los Angeles 
County, and the Albuquerque Museum. 

After this tour of North America a million persons or 
more will have been exposed to a journalistic, simplistic, 
and biased presentation of missions in Africa. 

Christians have as much right to share their beliefs with 
others as Marxists do, but in doing so they have over the 
centuries made many mistakes. Literature that makes all 
missionaries heroic saints denies what is evident to all but 
the most naive: missionaries are just people. 

Critical analyses of missions, as well as the imperialism 
of Islam, are necessary for getting at the truth of history 
and human behavior. It is deplorable, nonetheless, that a 
public institution should exploit what should be a tribute 
to Africans as an opportunity to reinforce the stereotype 
of the missionary as an ethnocentric, bigoted, and insen¬ 
sitive person. 


43 





In Review 


Theology, Politics , and Peace. Edited by 
Theodore Runyon. Maryknoll, NY: Orbis 
Books, 1989, 199 pp., $16.95. 

Reviewed by Abe Dueck 

This volume brings together lectures of 
a variety of politicians and theologians who 
met for a conference at the Carter Center 
of Emory University in 1988. Part I pro¬ 
vides the political perspectives of politi¬ 
cians from three continents—Europe, 
Latin America, and North America—with 
the keynote address by Jimmy Carter. 

Part II has a parallel theological division, 
with lectures by Juergen Moltmann, repre¬ 
senting the European theology of hope; 
Jose Miguez Bonino, representing the 
Latin American liberation theology per¬ 
spective; and Theodore R. Weber, repre¬ 
senting the North American Christian 
realist perspective. 

Part III, entitled “Other Voices,” en¬ 
hances the dialogue with relatively brief 
essays by twelve other politicians and theo¬ 
logians, including such notables as Andrew 
Young and John Howard Yoder. 

While the perspectives offered are often 
in stark opposition to each other, the book 
reveals a common deep sense of urgency of 
the pursuit of peace in a global context where 
theological and religious views are so diverse. 
As Moltmann contends, ours is the first 
common age of all people because of the 
threat of nuclear armaments. But even when 
the threat of nuclear annihilation subsides 
temporarily, as it may have, the truth is 
nevertheless that the issues of social and 
economic injustice are global issues which 
threaten the peace of everyone. 

Runyon provides a helpful introductory 
essay which summarizes the points of 
agreement and disagreement between the 
various contributors. The main points of 
consensus include the fact that an increase 
in political, economic, and ecological jus¬ 
tice are essential to stable peace, and that 
mutual security and mutual self-interest 
must be recognized to achieve peace. 

The essays are an encouraging sign that 
theologians and politicians are beginning 
to see the need for increased dialogue if 
there is to be any hope for the future. It is 
unfortunate that, except in a few cases, 
there is little sense of direct dialogue 
between the participants at the confer¬ 
ence—the essays stand in relative isolation 
from each other. 


Abe Dueck teaches at the Mennonite Brethren 
Bible College in Winnipeg Manitoba, Canada. 

44 


Faith Sharing. By H. Eddie Fox and 
George E. Morris. Grand Rapids, MI: Fran¬ 
cis Asbury Press, 1986, 131 pp., $7.95 (pb) 

Reviewed by James Nikkei 

This is a pleasant change from many “how¬ 
to” books on witness and faith sharing. The 
book is written against the backdrop of the 
church growth movement and uses both 
theory and practice of that approach. 

The authors attempt to turn non-growing 
churches back to a faith-sharing situation. 
They define faith sharing as one distin¬ 
guishing characteristic of a Bible-believing 
church, lay out the theological motive and 
understanding for faith sharing, effectively 
describe it as the central theme of Scrip¬ 
ture with God as initiator, and claim that 
only faith sharing assures constant infusion 
of new Christians into the fellowship, 
thereby keeping alive the spiritual vitality 
and growth of the body of Christ. 

The writers analyze the various miscon¬ 
ceptions and barriers of faith in order to 
move from merely having a belief system 
or dogma to a living practicing faith. The 
book attempts to bring clarity to faulty 
images of faith acceptance and sharing. 

By definition, this book follows a procla¬ 
mation rather than a harvest theology, thus 
removing fret over results. The authors 
make a strong case for the gospel being 
both visible and verbal, working and wait¬ 
ing. The book maintains a good balance of 
practical guidance and theological reflec¬ 
tion. It can be used for small group or 
personal witness orientation and should be 
read by every pastor. 


James Nikkei is executive director of the 
Board of Evangelism for the Canadian 
Mennonite Brethren Conference. 


World Christians: Eastern Europe. Edited 
by Philip Walters. Monrovia, CA: MARC 
International, 1988, 313 pp., $15.95 (pb) 

Reviewed by Hans Kasdorf 

Here, for the first time in history, is an 
updated source of information on the state 
of Christianity in nine Eastern European 
countries, including about 90 pages on the 
Soviet Union. Philip Walters, the editor, is 
Director of Research at Keston College, a 
globally recognized center for objective 
reporting on the church in the Soviet 
Union and—until recent times—her East¬ 


ern European communist allies. 

Following the foreword by Keston Col¬ 
lege founder Michael Bourdeaux and a 
six-page introduction by the editor, the 
book gives a panoramic overview of the 
Soviet Union, Poland, Hungary, Czechoslo¬ 
vakia, the German Democratic Republic, 
Albania, Romania, Bulgaria, and Yugosla¬ 
via. The book concludes with notes and “A 
Few Words About Keston College.” 

Varying in detail and length of descrip¬ 
tion, each chapter offers a profile of the 
country in terms of geography, people, 
history, economy, social conditions, and 
political life. Following this contextual in¬ 
formation is one section on “The Status of 
Christianity,” one on “The Various 
Churches and Denominations” (even the 
Mennonites are mentioned, pp. 86-87), 
and one on “Christian Activities.” This last 
part includes such aspects as evangelism 
and mission; broadcasting; literature pro¬ 
duction and distribution (official and unof¬ 
ficial); Bible translation and availability (or 
the need for Bibles); education of adults, 
youth, and children; social concerns of the 
church, and more. 

I have four observations: first, while the 
book is packed with information, it main¬ 
tains a consistent readable style without 
creating the impression of a demographic 
data bank. Second, the reader is also re¬ 
minded of the rapid changes which have 
taken place since the terms glasnost and 
perestroika have become watchwords of 
international significance. Third, one must 
also remember that the bulk of material for 
this book was compiled before much of the 
communism ideology had collapsed, gov¬ 
ernments had fallen, and the “great wall” 
had crumbled. Finally, anyone concerned 
about the church and its mission in Eastern 
Europe will find here a source of informa¬ 
tion that will inspire and motivate to par¬ 
ticipation in the missionary challenge of 
today. 


Hans Kasdorf is professor of World Mission 
at Mennonite Brethren Biblical Seminary in 
Fresno, California. 


The Puzzle of the Soviet Church: An 
Inside Look at Christianity and Glasnost. 
By Kent R. Hill. Portland: Multnomah, 
1989, 417 pp, $14.95. 

Reviewed by Hans Kasdorf 

The subtitle is misleading. While the au¬ 
thor was a player on stage in the freeing 
of the “Siberian Seven,” and while he is 
certainly knowledgeable about the Soviet 
scene, he can hardly claim to give an 
“inside look”; he simply looks in. 

Ever since the terms glasnost and per¬ 
estroika became watchwords in many lan¬ 
guages of the free world, the church in the 
Soviet Union may still be a “puzzle,” as Hill 
contends, but it is no longer a mystery. Just 
as the Berlin Wall has crumbled, so the 
Iron Curtain has been lifted and the long 
silence about the church is broken. 

But that does not alter the value of the 
book. Already in the 1970s we saw an 
increasing number of books, monographs, 
and articles appear in the West about 
Christian fate and faith under Soviet total¬ 
itarianism. The focus was largely on the 
suffering church. And that was justified. 
But when Aleksandr Solzhenitsyn as a true 
insider wrote The Gulag Archipelago (I and 
II), a new genre in church history began 
to appear: scientific, documented ac¬ 
counts. Walter Sawatzky’s Soviet Evangeli¬ 
cals Since World War II (Herald, 1981) 
paved the way and is by now a “classic.” 

During the last five years dozens of 
books have appeared in Russian, French, 
German, and English. All are telling the 
story of the church in different aspects and 
from different perspectives; they speak of 
its trials and its triumph. The book under 
re\iew is another attempt to tell that story. 
Several observations are in place. 

1. Hill s delineation of the political con¬ 
text is commendable. He takes the reader 
into the arena of conflict between belief 
and unbelief; it is a struggle between life 
and death. 

2. The historical account is well docu¬ 
mented. This applies particularly to section 
three describing the “Church and State” 
from 1917 to 1985. Hill correctly identifies 
the first twelve years after the Revolution 
as the “Golden Age” for the evangelicals 
and the 1929/39 decade as the “Nightmare 
Years.” 

3. The section on “Western Responses 
to Christians in the USSR” is well done. 
While the first part reinforces Walter 
Sawatzky’s contention that the World 
Council of Churches was politically biased 
in support of the Soviet measures against 
the church, the second part goes beyond 


Sawatzky by updating the record and by 
pointing to “Prospects for More Responsi¬ 
ble Policies.” 

4. Hill’s case study of the “Siberian 
Seven” reads almost like a mystery novel. 
It is a story of the seven Pentecostals who 
by choice lived for five years in the 
“prison” of the American embassy in Mos¬ 
cow. Hill’s assessment of the American 
response is less than complimentary. 

5. One can also appreciate the author’s 
cautious response to the legend that 
Gorbachev may be a “secret believer.” 
Even if he “is neither a secret believer nor 
a King Cyrus, it is still possible that per¬ 
estroika and glasnost may unleash forces 
able to challenge the grip of atheism on 
the ideology of the ruling party of the 
Soviet Union. That, in any event, must be 
the prayer of the religious communities” 
(p. 331). 

The appendices, an up-to-date bibliogra¬ 
phy, and a useful index help to make the 
book a comprehensive source of informa¬ 
tion on the larger church and its mission 
in the Soviet Union in the 1990s. 


Hans Kasdorf is professor of World Mission 
at Mennonite Brethren Biblical Seminary in 
Fresno, California. 


Mission Impossible: The Unreached Nosu 
on China s Frontier. By Ralph Covell. 
Pasadena, CA: Hope Publishing House, 
1990, 309 pp., $10.95 (pb) 

Reviewed by Dale Taylor 

Ralph Covell’s Mission Impossible recounts 
the story of the Conservative Baptist For¬ 
eign Mission Society work from 1946 to 
1951 in southwest China. The Nosu are a 
non-Chinese people, also known as Yi, 
Yizu, and Lolo. The book is primarily “for 
the record”; it is the group biography of 
the mission team of which the Covells 
were members. Readers who are inter¬ 
ested in broader issues concerning China 
and mission would prefer Co veil’s 1986 
title, Confucius, the Buddha, and Christ: A 
History of the Gospel in Chinese. 

Covell does not quite develop an argu¬ 
ment in this record; rather, he regularly 
hints toward some themes, by now well 
established in other interpretations, con¬ 
cerning the errors of many foreign mission 
ventures in China, the innocent high¬ 
handedness and cultural misunderstanding 


from which deportation and distance have 
released us. The tone is factual and forgiv¬ 
ing: the mission was “impossible” not be¬ 
cause of wrong missionary methods, but 
because of the raging of the nations, which 
the mission programs should perhaps have 
tried to understand. 

When Ralph Covell sailed to China in 
1946, with 669 other American missionar¬ 
ies, he thought that “the war” was over. 
Howv r, China’s war, which had begun 
in 1933, continued as civil war until the 
Guomindang fled China and established a 
government in Taiwan, late in 1949. Then 
in June 1950, China and the United Na¬ 
tions began actions in Korea. By the time 
American missionaries in China realized 
that China was at war, the war was against 
the United States. This, then, was the cause 
of the gradual but strongly encouraged, if 
not enforced, exodus of foreign missionar¬ 
ies from China in 1951. 

The church in China survived without 
missionaries, even during the persecutions 
of 1966-76. The Covells report on the basis 
of recent visits to their former home that 
the Chinese churches in the cities of the 
Jianchang Valley remain faithful, and that 
the Nosu higher in the mountains are still 
unreached. 


Dale Taylor lives in Edmonton, Alberta, 
Canada. 


The Word Among Us: Contextualizing 
Theology for Mission Today. Edited by 
Dean S. Gilliland. Dallas, TX: Word Pub¬ 
lishing, 1989, 344 pp., $19.95 (pb) 

Reviewed by Jerry Truex 

Contextualization, as both concept and 
mission strategy, is fraught with difficulty, 
danger, and controversy. Yet for Christians 
seeking to understand and appropriate the 
eternal Word in every particular situation, 
contextualization becomes the inevitable 
path of discipleship and the necessary 
means of evangelization. This conviction 
dominates and unifies The Word Among 
Us, a volume containing contributions from 
twelve faculty of the School of World 
Mission at Fuller Theological Seminary. 
The book presents six chapters which ad¬ 
dress theoretical issues and eight which 
aim at application. 

Theoretically, the authors believe that 
contextualization is biblical, supremely an- 

45 





chored by incarnational theology (Gilli¬ 
land). The Old Testament demonstrates 
that, although transcending culture, God 
chose to reveal himself through various 
cultural mediums (Glasser). Similarly, the 
New Testament utilizes diverse symbols 
and local expressions relevant to each con¬ 
text, yet it presents a coherent message 
(Gilliland). Thus, the “discontinuous 
continuity’’ of the covenant displays a 
model for contextualization today (Van 
Engen). What is called for is both a “crit¬ 
ical contextualization,’’ where cultural 
form and meaning are distinguished yet 
critically related (Hiebert), and a “recep¬ 
tor-oriented’’ approach, where the deepest 
human needs are met through word and 
life (Kraft). 

Application involves “transculturation” 
of the message (Shaw), utilization of stra¬ 
tegically assessed methods of communica¬ 
tion (Sogaard), employment of leadership 
models which fit receptor cultures (Clin¬ 
ton), and social transformation through 
pertinent relational goals (Elliston). North 
American (Wagner), Chinese (Che-Bin), 
and Muslim (Woodberry) receptor cul¬ 
tures are specifically addressed as well as 
the problem of Christian “nominality” 
(Gibbs). Finally, an appendix compares 
seven models of contextualization of which 
the “critical model” is affirmed. 

Although each of the authors displays 
various degrees of enthusiasm and critical 
assessment, the book has an apologetic 
tone. A full chapter addressing the risks of 
contextualization would have brought 
greater balance. Nevertheless, the authors 
may be commended for presenting com¬ 
plex issues for the nonspecialist and for 
continually citing and drawing upon their 
broad experiences to demonstrate that 
God communicates with people where 
they are. The book contains ample foot¬ 
notes, a full bibliography, and would be 
suitable as a college text. 


Jerry Truex is a third-year student at Men- 
nonite Brethren Biblical Seminary in 
Fresno, California. 


Signs of the Spirit: How Cod Reshapes the 
Church. By Howard A. Snyder. Grand 
Rapids, MI: Zondervan Publishing House, 
1989, 336 pp., $14.95 (pb) 

Reviewed by Walter Unger 

With the current plethora of plans to 
renew the church and evangelize the 
world by the year 2000 comes a very 
insightful book by Howard Snyder on how 
God renews the church and rekindles 
within it a sense of mission. God’s goal, 
affirms Snyder, is not just to renew the 
church, but to reconcile the world. 

The Montanist, Pietist, Moravian, and 
Methodist movements are analyzed as 
models of church renewal. In a key chapter 
entitled “Dynamics of Renewal Move¬ 
ments,” Snyder notes that the four move¬ 
ments were interwoven as part of a larger 
renewal flowing through the 17th and 18th 
centuries. All four made use of small cell 
groups and all made provisions for some 
practical expression of the priesthood of 
believers. Education and educational insti¬ 
tutions played a key role in all four renewal 
movements. The Scriptures were stressed 
as being normative in the life and experi¬ 
ence of the believer, and the early church 
was seen as the model of what church life 
should be. 

At numerous points the author compares 
the four movements with the believers 
church model, and also devotes a signifi¬ 
cant section to the Catholic Anabaptist 
typology (pp. 54-61). 

Each of these movements owed much of 
its dynamic to the key leaders who shaped 
them. Snyder concludes that “renewal 
movements are neither direct, irresistible 
acts of God nor the mere outworking of 
inexorable sociological laws or constraints. 
Much depends on human wisdom and 
choice. Spener, Francke, Zinzendorf, and 
Wesley all intended to see renewal come 
to the church and worked self-consciously 
to achieve it. The impact of the movements 
they led was due in large measure to the 
quality of the leadership they provided.” 

The final three chapters of the book 
present a model for renewal in our time, 
various dimensions of renewal (ranging 
from personal to missiological renewal), 
and a final word on a renewal strategy for 
the local church—all of which makes this 
insightful reading for pastors, missionaries, 


and lay leaders interested in renewal. 


Walter Unger is president of Columbia Bible 
College, Clearbrook, British Columbia. 


New Creation Book for Muslims. By Phil 
Goble and Salim Munayer. Pasadena, CA: 
Mandate Press, 1989, 175 pp., $7.95 (pb) 

Reviewed by Timothy Bergdahl 

Phil Goble and Salim Munayer are cross- 
cultural ministers who recognize limita¬ 
tions in traditional evangelical approaches 
to Muslims. They propose a radically con¬ 
textualized gospel, offering opportunities 
for Muslims to become “new creations” in 
Christ without requiring behavior abhor¬ 
rent to family, community, or culture. 

Quotations taken from Bible and Koran 
have been shaped into an exposition of the 
gospel and its implications for discipleship. 
Specific suggestions are offered regarding 
worship according to traditional Muslim 
patterns. 

Contextualization is a vital concept for 
evangelism among Muslims, but I struggled 
with some aspects of this particular ap¬ 
proach. Are Christians in a better position 
to interpret the Koran than Muslims? I 
don’t think so, and I doubt that the selec¬ 
tive paraphrasing of Koranic passages by 
the authors would impress knowledgeable 
Muslims. 

Also, what is the value of being a “new 
creation” Muslim? Can one be a “com¬ 
pleted Muslim,” in the sense that a Jewish 
believer is said to be a “completed Jew”? 
Can one claim to be a Muslim without 
giving authority to all of the Koran, the 
hadith, and the interpretation of the 
ulama? I wonder whether God has pre¬ 
pared Islam to be used in the way the 
authors intend. 


Timothy Bergdahl, currently studying at 
Fuller Theological Seminary, is employed by 
Mennonite Brethren Missions/Services in 
Hillsboro, Kansas. 


46 




A Guide to Christian Churches in the 
Middle East. By Norman A. Horner. 
Elkhart, IN: Mission Focus, 1989, 127 pp., 
$5.00 (pb) 

Reviewed by Harry Heubner 

This is one of the most delightful booklets 
about the church in the Middle East I have 
read. Having worked out of the MCC 
(West Bank) office for two years (1981- 
1983) and having visited many of the 
church offices in the Middle East, I find 
the vast statistical information and the 
succinctness with which it is all presented 
to be very helpful. During my time in the 
Middle East I worked through A. J. 
Arberry’s monumental two-volume work, 
Religion in the Middle East. Horner’s guide 
is a condensed version and updating of 
Arberry’s study of Christianity. 

Horner summarizes the theological/his¬ 
torical background as well as the sociolog¬ 
ical character of the following major 
church groupings: Eastern (Chalcedonian) 
Orthodox, Assyrian (“Nestorian”) Church 
of the East, Oriental (non-Chalcedonian) 
Orthodox churches, Eastern-rite Catholic 
churches, Latin-rite Catholic Church, An¬ 
glican Church, and Protestant churches. In 
each case he presents a sketch of the form 
these churches take from Morocco in the 
west to Muscat and Oman in the east, and 
from Turkey in the north to Sudan and 
Ethiopia in the south. He ends his study 
with some insightful reflections on the 
impact of the regional turmoil on the 
churches. Included also are two appendi¬ 
ces detailing the Christian constituencies 
in the regions, one according to churches 
and the other according to countries. 

This is a most valuable booklet. It is must 
reading for every foreign Christian work¬ 
ing in this vast region. But it is not the kind 
of book you can read once and put away. 
It is a reference book which should be 
consulted regularly. 


Harry Huebner is professor of philosophy 
and theology at Canadian Mennonite Bible 
College in Winnipeg, Manitoba, Canada. 


Jesus Christ Our Lord: Christology from 
a Disciple s Perspective. By C. Norman 
Kraus. Scottdale, PA: Herald Press, 1987, 
263 pp., $19.95 (pb) 

Reviewed by Tim Geddert 

According to Kraus the Bible, being an 
Asian book, is understood most clearly and 
interpreted most faithfully when examined 
through Asian cultural/religious/philo- 
sophical “glasses.” Western theologians 
who aim to be faithful to the post-biblical 
“orthodox creeds” inevitably distort its 
message. They focus too heavily on rational 
analyses of Christ’s being and on logical 
analyses of his atoning work. 

Kraus attempts to write from an Asian 
(and yet Anabaptist) perspective. His 
Christology focuses heavily on revelational 
and relational aspects of Christ’s person 
and work. We are saved through solidarity 
with Christ, not by appropriating a substi¬ 
tutionary atonement. 

Kraus’ approach is to critique and/or 
bypass the early creeds, and challenge 
many of the basic conclusions and/or as¬ 
sumptions of modern Western theology. 

I feel the results are mixed. There are 
some fresh insights on how certain New 
Testament texts should be interpreted. 
There is a helpful discussion on the impor¬ 
tance of viewing Christ’s person and work 
in more personal than ontological terms. 
There are valuable insights on how the 
message of the cross addresses “shame” 
cultures as opposed to 'guilt” cultures. 

But in the process Kraus denies, reinter¬ 
prets, or minimizes some fundamental 
Christian doctrines, calling them post-bib¬ 
lical distortions. Many theologians have 
substantially denied the empirical reality 
of Christ’s preexistence and virgin birth, 
eliminated “Trinitarian” language in dis¬ 
cussing God, virtually ignored the Holy 
Spirit, and attempted to present a theology 
of atonement which eliminates “sub¬ 
stitution” categories. But few have jetti¬ 
soned and/or minimized these biblical 
doctrines while claiming to be uncovering 
the real intentions of the biblical writers, 
as Kraus does. 

It is essential that Western theologians 
allow non-Western perspectives to shape 
the way the gospel is interpreted and 
presented. But this process need not re¬ 
quire as much reshaping of orthodox 
Christian faith as Kraus suggests. 


Tim Geddert is assistant professor of New 
Testament at the Mennonite Brethren Bib¬ 
lical Seminary in Fresno, California. 


Gods of Power: A Study of the Beliefs and 
Practices of Animists. By Philip M. Steyne. 
Houston, TX: Touch Publications, 1989, 
272 pp, (pb) 

Reviewed by Paul G. Hiebert 

In this book, Philip Steyne examines an 
important topic in contemporary mission 
and in the West—the worldview, beliefs, 
and practices of folk religions. Steyne 
draws upon his experiences as a missionary 
to South Africa and now as professor of 
missions at Columbia Graduate School of 
Bible and Missions to analyze these reli¬ 
gions phenomenologically and provide a 
Christian response. 

Steyne draws heavily upon Alan Tippett, 
his mentor in doctoral studies, and pre¬ 
sents basically a taxonomic approach to the 
subject. He examines the foundations of 
animistic religions: their views of spirits 
and mana, and their focus on power and 
control. He then discusses specific beliefs 
such as the animistic views of human na¬ 
ture, life force and ancestors, and specific 
practices such as magic, witchcraft, 
dreams, divination, and ordeals. He then 
looks at types of ritual specialists. In all of 
this, he points out how the people under¬ 
stand and see the world. 

The insights are helpful. What is needed 
is an examination of the basic human de¬ 
sires, needs, and questions which underlie 
these beliefs and behaviors and lead peo¬ 
ple to believe and act in these ways. If we 
do not look below specific religious expres¬ 
sions, we are in danger of reacting only to 
surface manifestations, and of not provid¬ 
ing Christian answers to the deeper long¬ 
ings of people’s hearts. 

Steyne provides a good initial Christian 
response to animistic beliefs and practices. 
Much more needs to be done along this 
line, or Christianity will be seen only as a 
superior magic or cargo religion providing 
people with greater powers and blessings, 
rather than as a new gospel that challenges 
both the old animistic and the modern 
secular worldviews. Steyne’s book is a good 
introduction to a subject not only for mis¬ 
sionaries, but also for those working in the 
post-modern West with its neopaganisms, 
New Age, eastern cults, and focus on self 
and power. 


Paul G. Hiebert is professor in the School 
for World Mission, Fuller Theological Sem¬ 
inary in Fresno, California. 


47 


Editorial 


In 1987 in Mission Focus we began a series of articles on 
the theme: “How my understanding of mission has devel¬ 
oped. ’ A dozen contributions, including Henry Schmidt s 
in this issue, have appeared. Two other articles have also 
contributed to this reflection—Robert Ramseyer’s in the 
June 1990 issue, and Albert Buckwalter’s in December 
1987. It seems worthwhile to summarize and underscore 
some of the notes that have been sounded by people who 
have been involved in mission in a variety of ways over a 
long span of time on several continents. 

The missionary vocation requires that the missionary be 
able to live with a tension. The one pole consists of 
commitment to Jesus Christ and unswerving loyalty to the 
gospel. The other pole is comprised of commitment to the 
people of another culture. Such commitment demands 
identification with them, symbolized by their deepest 
aspirations. Most of us have to learn how to live with this 
tension. We set out on this cross-cultural—but not neces¬ 
sarily international—pilgrimage more clearly aware of one 
pole or the other. Albert Buckwalter’s experience is a 
particularly compelling example of transformation of a 
missionary’s worldview as the prior condition for genuine 
encounter. 

What we sometimes overlook is that the experience of 
this tension is not unique to the missionary as outsider. 
Both Takio Tanase and Milka Rindzinski commented on 
the ways their own worldviews were affected by encoun¬ 
ter with the missionary “outsider.’’ The result was to make 
them less conformed to their culture at crucial points 
precisely because they had embraced the “Christ’’ pole 
and underwent a restructuring of their worldview. 

In light of this, Frances Hiebert’s counsel that we not 
concede too much to contextualization takes on added 
cogency. An uninhibited emphasis on context can cause 
us to lose sight of that which alone can transcend and 
redeem culture. 

A note that is sounded repeatedly is the extent to which 
we find ourselves in the role of learner. We may have 
gone to preach, teach, and heal, but we have repeatedly 
heard the good news with fresh power and experienced 
a new degree of wholeness through the faith of those to 
whom we have gone. This calls forth a sense of gratitude, 
as when Alle Hoekema tells of the way the Indonesian 
churches became his tutor, teaching lessons that opened 
up entirely new vistas of faith. Albert Buckwalter reported 
how they “have been profoundly changed by the Indians’ 
response to the Scripture message.’’ Response begets 
response; learning takes place as we join together in a 
common pilgrimage to “the city of our God.’’ 

In addition to being willing to learn from others, we can 
learn better teaching methods. In a particularly compel¬ 
ling passage Miriam Krantz tells how she was driven to 
observe life-patterns and listen to the villagers she so 


much wished to help. “I did this by visiting and observing 
village families for one year until I could ask questions in 
ways that the villagers could come up with possible 
solutions themselves.’’ As a kind of footnote, she adds: “I 
am reminded how often Jesus used questions to involve 
people in their own healing and growth in understand¬ 
ing.” 

Gerald Stucky sounded a note that has been a recurring 
theme—the importance of the Bible. Delbert and Frieda 
Erb continue to be concerned that the needs of lay people 
be met through training programs suited to their level. 
They call for priority attention to “base inductive Bible 
teaching.” The meaning of the biblical message is deep¬ 
ened and broadened through common experience and 
study. To see that message, as portrayed in the Bible, 
become a transforming power in the lives of the barrio- 
dwellers of Buenos Aires—or any other major metropo¬ 
lis—and the rural poor of Bolivia, is to find oneself caught 
up in the drama of redemptive history. Jose Gallardo 
conveys the urgency and compassion he has felt for 
society’s cast-offs growing out of his own biblical and 
theological studies and his experience of being an evan¬ 
gelist. 

Leo Laurense and Arthur Climenhaga can view the 
fundamental changes that have come in the relationship 
between mission and church in the past generation as the 
result of moving from one historical era to another. Glenn 
and Lois Musselman have remained involved over a 
period of more than thirty-five years with the church they 
helped to found, by flexibly moving from one role to 
another, first under mission direction and then under the 
church’s decision. Takio Tanase applauds such 
“Abrahamic” mobility as the essence of mission. 

Not only is the missionary called to move from one 
culture to another but to mediate between historical 
periods of the Christian tradition. Robert Ramseyer re¬ 
flects on his attempts to draw inspiration and insight from 
the sixteenth-century Anabaptist movement as he has 
worked out his missionary vocation in Japan. Milka 
Rindzinski testifies to the attraction of this vision of the 
gospel in helping her decide to identify with the Menno- 
nite Church in Uruguay where she has made a strong 
contribution as a leader and trainer of others. 

As Henry Schmidt puts it, his own development has 
been “full of surprises.” This sentiment is shared by most 
of those who have written of their pilgrimages. By defini¬ 
tion a pilgrimage involves responding to a call without 
having a detailed itinerary in hand at the outset. It is the 
one who calls who also provides the “surprises” along the 
way. Most surprising of all is looking back on the Journey 
and discovering that all the disparate parts have con¬ 
nected up and a pattern has emerged. 

—Wilbert R. Shenk 


POSTMASTER: Send Form 3579 to Box 370, Elkhart, IN 46515-0370 



December 1990 
Volume 18 Number 4 


MISSION 

FOCUS 



The Missionary and Music 

ALBERT W. D. FRIESEN 


Music plays an important role in almost every cultural 
setting in the world. Missionaries work alongside national 
Christians in these settings, sharing the good news and 
working to make that news understood and accepted by 
persons within those cultures. An important step in help¬ 
ing the gospel become an indigenous part of the religious 
experience is the use of music. Many missionaries have 
insufficient musical and ethnomusicological training to be 
helpful in the development of indigenous Christian music. 
By assisting the indigenous culture to analyze or evaluate 
its own musical culture, missionaries can encourage na¬ 
tional Christians to create their own type of biblical sacred 
music for worship, fellowship, teaching, and evangelism. 

The purpose of this article is, first, to make a chronolog¬ 
ical survey of the main resources available on the devel¬ 
opment of thought on indigenous hymnody and the actual 
development of this hymnody. Second, it attempts to shed 
light on the methodology of hymn writing so that mission¬ 
aries can encourage the creation of another culture’s 
indigenous music for Christian worship. 

Chronology of indigenous hymnody 

Asian missionaries seemed to be aware of the need for 
indigenous Christian music before missionaries in other 
continents. An article published in the Encyclopedia of 
Missions (Bliss 1891:151-55) listed hymnals of India, 
Turkey, and Persia, in use from 1853 to 1889, which used 
indigenous music. 

H. A. Popley discussed India’s music in his excellent 
article “The Musical Heritage of India’’ (Popley 1920:200- 
213; 1921a:223-35). He deplored missionaries’ unwilling¬ 
ness to learn from India’s culture and to “Indianize” 
Christianity. Popley emphasized his conviction that only 
purely Indian music should be sung, and no attempts at a 
hybrid of Indian and Western styles should be made, since 
these broke almost every law of Indian music. His book, 
The Music of India (1921b) provided an important step in 
understanding and using Indian music in the church. 

From the 1950s to today, much more has been written 
about Christian expressions of worship in other cultures. 
Rolla Foley’s book Song of the Arab (1953) included 
Christian folk songs from the Holy Land as sung by Arabs. 
Foley recognized that a lack of appreciation of the 

Albert W. D. Friesen studied ethnomusicology at University of 
Michigan and served with Mennonite Brethren Missions/Services 
in Austria as church planter. He is currently an associate pastor 
at Bridgeway Community Church in Swift Current, Saskatche¬ 
wan. 


indigenous music so important to the Arabs had disas¬ 
trously limited the use of native music in the church. 

A book similar to Popley’s is Emmons E. White’s Appre¬ 
ciating Indias Music (1957). Two chapters on music in 
evangelism and music in the church updated what was 
being done to utilize Indian music in Christianity. White 
suggested some progressive and positive methods by 
which church music could be improved. 

A book still of relevance for missionaries today is Henry 
Weman’s African Music and the Church in Africa (I960). 
It was important, not in its generalizations about African 
music, but in its suggestions to missionaries on how to use 
African music in the church. Alan P. Merriam (1963:134- 
37) stated in his review of the book that it would be 
important to ethnomusicologists of the future as a basic 
document for planned change in African music. Merriam 
also suggested that studies should be done in specific areas 
of Africa, since Weman’s generalizations were not very 
accurate. In the intervening years, many good studies have 
become available, describing not how to develop such 
music, but rather how it actually happened in many 
cultural, historic settings. 

An important article by J. H. Kwabena Nketia entitled 
“The Contribution of African Culture to Christian 
Worship” (Nketia 1962) gives a brief but good analysis of 
the characteristics of African languages and of music 
which should be used in the church to make worship 
relevant to the African. 

The November-December 1962 issue of Practical An¬ 
thropology was devoted to the subject of “Music, Church, 
and Ethnocentrism,” including an editorial by William 
Smalley (1962:272-73). In the same issue, Mary Key, in 
“Hymn Writing with Indigenous Tunes” (1962:257-62), 
researched the meaning of music in different societies, its 
cultural setting, and its function. 

Another article on African music from this issue of 
Practical Anthropology is “Indigenous Hymnody of Ivory 
Coast” by Louis L. King (1962:268-70). King discussed 
the spontaneous development, without appreciable mis¬ 
sionary stimulation, of local musical traditions for Christian 
worship and witness. The fact that missionaries had little 
to do with this development is significant. 

An excellent in-depth study of Chinese music was 
written by David Sheng (1964) in “A Study of the 
Indigenous Elements in Chinese Christian Hymnody.” 
Sheng researched the effect Chinese nationalism had on 
the writing of hymns, from the Nestorian hymns of the 
Tang Dynasty to the Hymns of Universal Praise published 


49 




in 1936. He noted that Chinese Christianity was influ¬ 
enced by the “Three Religions"—Confucianism, Taoism, 
and Buddhism—and gave examples of these influences in 
Chinese hymns which displayed a fusion of oriental and 
occidental cultures. He came to the same conclusion many 
had before him: a greater use of native tunes for Christian 
praise, traditional or original, is necessary. 

Gerhardus C. Oosthuizen’s study, The Theology of a 
South African Messiah: An Analysis of the Hymnal of (( The 
Church of the Nazarites” (1967) is a major step beyond 
the study of style to the study of content. This implies an 
acceptance of hymns as part of the organizational estab¬ 
lishment. The hymns are not mere experiments of cultural 
expression in worship, but are the catechism of the 
Nazarite movement. 

Another helpful article from Practical Anthropology is 
entitled “On Ethnic Music" written by Vida Chenoweth 
and Darlene Bee (1968:205-12). The authors discuss some 
important guidelines in approaching the oral musical 
tradition of another culture and some dangers of introduc¬ 
ing Western hymns to these cultures, stating that indige¬ 
nous composers should be encouraged to write hymns. An 
interesting concept of indigenous hymn writing comes 
from New Guinea, where some nationals “dreamed" songs 
which were quite acceptable in Christian worship. 

Dorothy James, in her article “Toward an Ethnic 
Hymnody" (1969:34-38), mentions that discerning indig¬ 
enous Christians are the best judges of what types of music 
from their own culture could be used in ethnic hymnody. 
This seems to have been the first recorded indication that 
outsiders should not be the judges of what was musically 
acceptable for worship. 

Two other specific studies are Isaiah Mapoma s article 
“The Use of Folk Music Among Some Bemba Church 
Congregations in Zambia" (1971:72-88), and Lazarus 
Ekwueme’s “African Music in Christian Liturgy: The Igbo 
Experiment" (1973:12-33). The latter article, in addition 
to stating some problems of relating a tonal language to 
Western music, mentions some of the experiments taking 
place during the special seasons of the Christian church, 
and lists a number of musicians with examples of their 
songs. 

A significant development in the use of Christian indig¬ 
enous music was the employment of native Christians who 
were musical experts to teach indigenous music to West¬ 
ern missionaries and their children. Robert Granner 
(1973:6-11) relates that a school for missionary children 
developed a program for occidental students to help them 
gain a proper understanding of Indian music. The instruc¬ 
tor was an Indian Christian who had studied at the 
Annamalai University in Chidambaram near Madras and 
who was the first Christian in South India to obtain the 
title of “Sangita Bhushanam," which means “an ornament 
of music.” This reveals progress in efforts toward integrat¬ 
ing indigenous music and Christian truths and worship. 

Descriptive articles and dissertations have been written 
in recent years which describe the history of the hymn 
development, the processes of hymn creation, and hymn 
content and use. Included in these is James Krabilfs 
dissertation, “The Hymnody of the Harrist Church Among 
the Dida of South-Central Ivory Coast (1913-1949): An 
Historico-Religious Study" (1989) and his published arti¬ 
cle “Dida Harrist Hymnody (1913-1990)" (1990:118-52). 
The latter appears in the June 1990 Journal of Religion in 
Africa along with three other articles on the development 
of African hymnody. Another dissertation on African 


music by Roberta King, not available for this article, has 
been completed at the Fuller School of World Mission. 

Methodology of hymn writing 

A final word needs to be written about specific attempts 
at establishing a methodology of writing hymns. The 
article “How One Tribe Got Its Own Music" by Morgan 
W. Jones, Jr. (1975:38-40), describes a three-stage process 
by which the Trio Indians of Surinam developed their own 
hymnody. In the first stage, missionaries wrote songs in 
the indigenous language and set these lyrics to simple 
Western tunes which the Trios adapted to fit their minor, 
pentatonic scales. In the second stage, the Trios started 
to write their own lyrics for these adapted tunes. And in 


December 1990 Volume 18 Number 4 

MISSION [7k 

FOCUS W 

49 The Missionary and Music 
Albert W. D. Friesen 

52 Evolving African Hymnody 
Mary K. Oyer 

56 William Wade Harris (1860-1929): African Evangelist 
and "Ethnohymnologist" 

James R. Krabill 

59 Sing to the Lord a New Song 
Malcolm Wenger 

62 Experiencing Native American Music: Living with 
Cheyenne and Crow Indians 
David Graber 

65 In review 

67 Mission Focus Index 

68 Editorial 


EDITORIAL COUNCIL 

Editor Wilbert R. Shenk 

Review editor Wilbert R. Shenk 

Other members Peter M. Hamm, Robert L. Ramseyer 

Managing editor Betty Kelsey 


MISSION FOCUS (ISSN 0164-4696) is published quarterly at 500 
S. Main St., Elkhart, Indiana, by Mennonite Board of Missions. 
Single copies available without charge. Send correspondence to 
Box 370, Elkhart, IN 46515-0370. Second-class postage paid at 
Elkhart, Indiana, and at additional mailing offices. Lithographed in 
USA. Copyright 1990 by Mennonite Board of Missions. 
POSTMASTER: Send address changes to MISSION FOCUS, Box 
370, Elkhart, IN 46515-0370. 


50 




the third stage, the Trios composed both lyrics and music. 

The second article is Vida Chenoweth’s “Spare Them 
Western Music” (1984:30-35). Principles are presented 
which will encourage all workers in a cross-cultural situation 
to be catalysts for indigenous music. Interestingly, no en¬ 
couragement is given for artificial creation sessions: 

Some of our number are trying to hurry this process by 
means of workshops during which time nationals are expected 

to produce Christian songs on demand_A workshop—in 

the sense that a group meets in order to produce a repertoire 
on demand—can be superficial both spiritually and musically. 
... A couple of dangers inherent in the workshop method 
have been observed: The participant quickly adjusts some 
new text to a traditional melody (and is sometimes laughed 
down because of the lingering connotations of the melody) 
or, in some cases, the participant sweats with frustration and 
embarrassment, unable to fulfill the request’’ (Chenoweth 
1984 : 30 ). 

The final attempt, “A Methodology in the Development 
of Indigenous Hymnody” (1982:83-96), is my own, and is 
excerpted from my thesis of the same title (1981). Both 
outline a two-part, eight-step approach, providing guide¬ 
lines for the musical and nonmusical missionary who wants 
to promote indigenous musical culture. Part I introduces 
song types, instruments, singers and instrumentalists, and 
technical characteristics. Part II consists of the psycholog¬ 
ical ramifications of the first part: song type evaluation, 
instrumental evaluation, the use of existing melodies and 
composition of new melodies, and testing. Finally, five 
missiological principles to help focus the methodology are 
presented: 

1. An analysis of the indigenous music system is neces¬ 
sary in order to develop an intelligible, theological, and 
cultural hymnody for the church. 

2. Continuity of culture is vital to a smooth transition 
and thus an indigenous development of Christianity. 

3. The missionary’s role is one of catalyst/trainer/per- 
former. 

4. The discerning indigenous Christians are the best 
judges and thus should be the final arbitrators of what is 
acceptable in ethnic hymnody and what should be omitted. 

5. Ultimately everything in every culture must be eval¬ 
uated in light of biblical principles and the ethnotheology 
of the society. 

In conclusion, this is an attempt to help people working 
in cross-cultural church settings to reflect on the process 
of music composing—most articles mentioned are avail¬ 
able from the author. We hope the least that will happen 
as a result of this reflection is that no one will stand in the 
way of such a growth of Christian music. At best, mission¬ 
aries will become catalysts in the development of beauti¬ 
ful, meaningful, and valuable music in the Christian 
church around the world. 

References cited 

Bliss, Edwin Munsell, ed. 

1891 “Music and Missions,” Encyclopedia of Missions, Vol. II, New 
York: Funk and Wagnalls. 

Chenoweth, Vida 

1984 “Spare Them Western Music,” Evangelical Missions Quarterly 
20 (January). 


Chenoweth, Vida and Darlene Bee 

1968 “On Ethnic Music,” Practical Anthropology 15 (September/Oc- 
tober). 

Ekwueme, Lazarus Nnanyelu 

1973 “African Music in Christian Liturgy: The Igbo Experiment,” 
African Music Society Journal 5. 

Foley, Rolla 

1953 Song of the Arab: The Religious Ceremonies, Shrines, and Folk 
Music of the Holy Land Christian Arab, New York: Macmillan. 

Friesen, Albert W. D. 

1981 “A Methodology in the Development of Indigenous Hymnody,” 
unpublished master’s thesis, Fresno: Mennonite Brethren Bib¬ 
lical Seminary. 

1982 “A Methodology in the Development of Indigenous Hymnody,” 
in Missiology: An International Review 10 (January). 

Granner, Robert C. 

1973 “The Sound of India’s Music in a Christian School,’ Journal of 
Church Music 15 (July/August). 

James, Dorothy 

1969 “Toward an Ethnic Hymnody,” Practical Anthropology 16 
(J anuary/F ebruary). 

Jones, Morgan W., Jr. 

1975 “How One Tribe Got Its Own Music,” Evangelical Missions 
Quarterly 11 (January). 

Key, Mary 

1962 “Hymn Writing with Indigenous Tunes,” Practical Anthropol¬ 
ogy 9 (November/December). 

King, Louis L. 

1962 “Indigenous Hymnody of the Ivory Coast,” Practical Anthro¬ 
pology 9 (November/December). 

Krabill, James R. 

1989 “The Hymnody of the Harrist Church Among the Dida of 
South-Central Ivory Coast (1913-1949): An Historico-Religious 
Study,” unpublished dissertation, Great Britain: University of 
Birmingham. 

1990 “Dida Harrist Hymnody,” Journal of Religion in Africa 20 
(June). 

Mapoma, Isaac Mwesa 

1971 “The Use of Folk Music Among Some Bemba Church Congre¬ 
gations in Zambia,” 1969 Yearbook of the International Folk 
Music Council 1, Urbana: University of Illinois Press. 

Merriam, Alan P. 

1963 Review of “African Music and the Church in Africa” in 
Ethnomusicology 7 (May). 

Nketia, J. H. Kwabena 

1962 “The Contribution of African Culture to Christian Worship,” in 
Christianity in Africa As Seen by Africans, ed. by Ram Desai, 
Denver: Alan Swallow. 

Oosthuizen, Gerhardus C. 

1967 The Theology of a South African Messiah: An Analysis of the 
Hymnal of “The Church of the Nazarites, ” Leiden: E. J. Brill 

Popley, Herbert A. 

1920 “The Musical Heritage of India,” International Review of Mis¬ 
sions 9 (April), Part I. 

1921a “The Musical Heritage of India,” International Review of 
Missions 10 (April), Part II. 

1921b The Music of India, London: Oxford University Press. 

Sheng, David 

1964 “A Study of the Indigenous Elements in Chinese Christian 
Hymnody,” unpublished dissertation, University of Southern 
California. 

Smalley, William A. 

1962 “Music, Church, and Ethnocentrism,” Practical Anthropology 9 
(November/December). 

Weman, Henry 

1960 African Music and the Church in Africa, trans. by Eric J. Sharpe, 
Studia Missionalia Upsaliensia 3, Uppsala: Svenska Institute for 
Missionsforskning. 

White, Emmons E. 

1957 Appreciating India’s Music, The Christian Students’ Library, 
Vol. XIV, ed. by J. R. Chandran, Madras: Christian Literature 
Society for the Senate of Serampore. 


51 


Evolving African Hymnody 

MARY K. OYER 


The hymnody of a people reflects that group’s mode of 
perceiving and responding to God’s person and acts in 
history. Both the concepts of the text and the character 
of the music reveal the particular people’s view of life— 
their experience of time and space, of cosmic order, and 
of relationships among human beings and the supernatural 
world. 

Congregations seldom find a need to articulate the role 
of hymns in their worship. It is usually obvious. There is 
for individuals and for the group an inner recognition of 
the value of their tradition without rationalized explana¬ 
tions. When two diverse groups wish to meet, however, 
the traditions of worship of the one—in use of language 
and music—will not be immediately understandable to the 
other. In order to communicate, they will need to learn 
each other’s language and find some way to grasp the 
other’s musical idiom. 

Unfortunately, when missionaries went to Africa almost 
two hundred years ago, they saw the need to study 
language, but they carried their own hymns and musical 
practices with them. They translated the texts into various 
vernaculars, even though the shape of the Western musi¬ 
cal line violated the tone of the African language, and 
accents often fell on unaccented syllables of text. 

We have the record, through oral transmission, of a 
remarkable exception to this general rule. Ntsikana, the 
first Xhosa Christian in South Africa, composed a hymn 
in his own idiom. The translation reads: 

He is the Great God, Who is in heaven. 

Thou art Thou, true Shield. 

Thou are Thou, Stronghold of truth. 

Thou art Thou, Thicket of truth. 

Thou art Thou who dwellest in the highest 

He who created life below, created life above. 

That Creator who created, created heaven. 

This Maker of the stars and the Pleiades. 

A star flashed forth, it was telling us. 

The Maker of the blind, does he not make them of a purpose? 

The trumpet sounded. It has called us. 

As for his chase, he hunts for souls. 

He, who reconciles flocks that fight with each other. 

He, the Leader, who has led us; 

He is the Great Blanket; we do put it on. 

Those hands of thine, they are wounded. 

Those feet of thine, they are wounded. 

Thy blood, why is it streaming? 

Thy blood, it was shed for us. 

This great price; are we worthy? 

This home of thine; are we worthy? 

(Lumko Song Book 1984, No.7) 


The music consisted of one phrase, falling from its 
highest note to its lowest at the end of the phrase (Ex. 1): 
Example 1 


-v- . fr 

T - 

1 

1 

...A... L # 1 


! 


... nil V _ r. 

w . fj ... J. 1 

_i 

—j 

- 

f 1 J 




B - (e-(e Wowi, h om-vut* 


Mary Oyer was a member of the Goshen College faculty from 
1945-87. She first visited East Africa in 1969 and taught at 
Kenyatta University 1980-81 and 1985-86. Mary served as 
executive secretary of the Mennonite Hymnal project 1962-69, 
as secretary of the Hymnal Project Committee from 1982-89, and 
was editor of the Hymnal Sampler published in 1989. 


Its shape is far more African than Western. European 
melodies tend toward an arch shape, with moderate rise 
and fall. The continuous repetition of that one musical 
phrase for the entire text was and still is an attractive form 
in traditional music, but it may have been one reason why 
Western missionaries neither understood nor valued the 
hymn. It is hard to imagine what might have happened to 
missions had Ntsikana’s poetic and musical gifts been 
acknowledged and pursued, but Western hymns in trans¬ 
lation prevailed in mission churches for nearly one hun¬ 
dred and fifty years after his Great Hymn. 

Early in the twentieth century, indigenous groups began 
to break away from mission churches, often following the 
call of a prophetic leader. The Harrists in Ivory Coast, for 
example, the Kimbanguists of Zaire, and the Zionists in 
Southern Africa all emerged in early decades of this 
century. In Kenya, secessions of new groups began in 1914 
and by 1972 over 150 distinct groups were reported in 
the Kenya Churches Handbook (Kealy 1972:67). Many 
had thousands of followers. These independent or indig¬ 
enous churches usually rejected the policies of the mission 
churches as well as their westernized modes of worship. 
They encouraged the use of traditional instruments, 
though they tended to make drums of their own design, 
size, and shape in order to distinguish their use in 
Christian worship from specific roles in traditional society, 
for which specific drums functioned. 

Mission churches throughout the continent had good 
opportunities to hear indigenous church singing. A num¬ 
ber of congregations, such as the Africa Israel Ninevah 
Church of Kenya, often worshiped out of doors; services 
began and ended with processions to a drum beat through 
the village or town. Each denomination, however, seemed 
to retain its own distinctive musical style, perhaps a bit 
like North American denominations and even congrega¬ 
tions, which can be recognized by the type of hymns they 
sing—perhaps German chorales, gospel songs, or prayer 
and praise types. 

A significant breakthrough came with the Second Vat¬ 
ican Council, 1963-65. African Catholics were mandated 
to Africanize: 

In certain parts of the world, especially in mission lands, 
there are peoples who have their own musical traditions, and 
these play a great part in their religious and social life. For 
this reason due importance is to be attached to their music 
and a suitable place is to be given to it ... adapting worship 
to their genius (Mbiti 1972:xviii). 

The impact on the musical style of East African Catho¬ 
lics could not be instantaneous, but within a decade 
Masses and hymns in the Kiswahili language and in 
African musical styles were spreading rapidly. At the same 
time, the Lutherans and Anglicans in Tanzania were 
experimenting with singing Christian texts to traditional 
melodies. 

It may be valuable to try to identify the elements of an 
indigenous “African” style of music. Although each ver¬ 
nacular carries with it a unique music, certain distinguish¬ 
ing generalizations are possible. 

1. Rhythm is basic to the musical texture. For some 
groups, the drum is essential to an African sound. Father 


52 




Stefan Mbunga of Tanzania in a 1967 workshop presented 
a paper on “The Right Appreciation of Tanzanian Indig¬ 
enous Music/’ urging the use of drums: 

... you cannot prohibit African instrumental music or dancing 
without disturbing the soul’s life. But you can give a new 
outlook and content to drumming and dancing through 
religious ideas and influences. The drum is not in itself a 
“heathen” instrument, but because it is used in many pagan 
contexts it had been regarded with suspicion ... In fact, it is 
the rhythm of the drums which “crosses” the rhythm of the 
song, and helps to create the interplay of rhythms which is 
the foremost distinguishing mark of African music (Mbungu 
1967:6). 

For other people, a shaker or hand claps may have the 
highest priority. In any case, the texture will be dense— 
full of beats. There will be cross rhythms: two beats against 
three occur frequently. For example, Jean Kidula re¬ 
corded the singing of SOLID ROCK (Example 2) among 
Pentecostals and Quakers of Western Kenya. They altered 
the rhythm to accommodate a faster tempo, then added 
two claps to each triple grouping (Kidula 1986:117). 

2. The emphasis on rhythm draws out the dance. North 
Americans can sit very still while singing, using only the 
head. An African would involve the whole person, often 
allowing different parts of the body to pick up the varied 
lines of rhythm. The whole body is involved in praise when 
Africans use their own idioms. Languages reveal that 
dance is inseparable from music. English has two words, 
music and dance. Ngoma in Kiswahili could mean drum 
or dance or the entire musical event. That language would 
talk of music in isolation with a Western-derived word, 
musiki. 

3. The predominance of rhythm minimizes melody and 
harmony. Western music emphasizes precision of pitch in 
order to be able to combine notes in harmony. The 
percussive sounds of rattles and shakers, which are always 
present in African style, diffuse the sound and reduce 
clarity of pitch. It may be more important for a melody to 
follow the tone of the vernacular language than to settle 
on pitches which can be identified by lines and spaces of 
Western notation. Melodies often start high and fall 
gradually, as in Ntsikana’s Great Hymn. They may cascade 
downward slowly in a shape which Curt Sachs, one of the 
earliest ethnomusicologists, claimed to be a common 
gesture in ancient melodies around the world. 

Harmonies, which function to create tension and reso¬ 
lution in Western hymns, usually have a different role in 
African music, if they appear at all. A second voice may 
be added to a Western hymn—even third and fourth 
voices—but the harmonies will probably be altered to 
adjust to African tastes. Opposite motion of parts, which 
Westerners value, may turn into parallel gliding lines 
which decorate a melody rather than providing clash and 
tension. Here is a phrase of parallel lines in “My Jesus, I 
Love Thee,” which I heard Brethren in Christ Zambians 
sing in 1987 (Example 3): 

Example 2 


Example 3 



Choirs learn their parts in lines, one at a time, rather 
than by chords. The resulting sound is more linear than 
vertical and harmonic. Key changes may be avoided by 
eliminating accidentals. 

4. The strophic form (the same music used for each 
stanza) of a Western hymn is not a lively African form. 
Much more common is a solo-response structure in rather 
rapid interchange. The response is frequently repetitious 
so that the group can learn it on one hearing and will have 
no trouble responding as needed. The length of the 
interchange is not programmed in advance. A given hymn 
may be brief one day and considerably longer on the next, 
depending on the leader’s imagination and the energy 
with which the group responds. The solo-response form 
signifies an important relationship. Nathan Corbitt discov¬ 
ered in his work with coastal Kenyans that “without a 
leader, the song does not sing well.” The leader must be 
able to “light the fire,” to “fill the heart” for the singers 
(Corbitt 1985:156). Solo and response make an insepara¬ 
ble pair, creating the complete expression. 

An equally important structural characteristic is the 
cyclical repetition of a brief phrase (as in Ntsikana’s Great 
Hymn). For my ears, there seems to be no strong forward 
thrust or sense of growth leading to a climax in much 
traditional music. Perhaps work songs influence this form. 
A work song regulates the speed of activity, keeping it 
uniform—neither too fast nor too slow. This evenness of 
flow in time strikes the Westerner as a unique African 
contribution to world music. It may symbolize an attitude 
toward time which accepts, rather than attempts to over¬ 
come, the natural regularities: day and night, the changing 
seasons, for example. Marwa Kisare, Mennonite Bishop in 
western Tanzania, commented in his autobiography on the 
cyclical effect of the music of the Luo drums played at 
his father’s burial: 

As Father’s body was lowered into the grave, the drums 
began their rolling dirge—rising and falling like the ceaseless 
rolling of waves onto the lakeshore, sighing and moaning, 
representative of the ceaseless circle of life, birth, bloom, 
infinity, death, round and round, a dirge articulating the 
sorrow and despair deep in the souls of scores of people cut 
adrift by Father’s passing (Kisare 1984:34). 

5. What makes a “beautiful” sound is determined by the 
ideals of a particular culture. The West over the centuries 
has cut out the buzzing sounds which are vital to tradi¬ 
tional African music. An African university student told 
me that there is no emotion without a buzz. The sound of 
most instruments dies away rapidly. The sustained char¬ 
acter of the imported organs must have shocked and 


teceMES: 



□ 


1 T~Z . | 

□ 

rr->, 



p 

—1 


□ 

p 

p 

□ 

i_i 

1 i 



rn 

P“ 

Zj 

rz 


~/L —i_ 

□ 

L Li 



□ 

i ' 


JjL -1—1 

□ 

□ 

□ 

p ] 

□ 

□ 

□ 

□ 

□ 

tzj 

m W # 

uQf- 

□ 

l—I— 

UJ 

□ 



Mitape- is buitt on (css % X 


r r 


X 

r 


X 

r 


X X 

rr 


XX X x XX- XX 

r r rrff rr 


53 



baffled early African Christians, who were accustomed 
instead to fast reiterated sounds. In addition, much music¬ 
making takes place out-of-doors. An enclosed space, so 
valued by Westerners since the first opera house in 1637, 
creates very different acoustical effects. Some Africans 
have learned to like it, but for many of them it is an 
acquired taste. 

Within the past three decades the movement toward 
these indigenous African values has increased. I suggest 
four stages in that change of direction and will illustrate 
each with an example from the Mennonite Church in 
Eastern Africa. 

1. The continued use of Western hymns in translation, 
though altered to fit local tastes. 

2. Exploring the use in hymns of the innovations 
introduced by choirs. 

3. Writing Christian texts for traditional tunes. 

4. Composing new works in African styles. 

The Mennonite Church in East Africa, like other mis¬ 
sion churches, has been enlarging its vision of a hymnody 
in African style. 

1. Western hymns in translation, especially in Kiswahili, 
are valued. A hymnbook, Tenzi za Rohoni (Songs of the 
Spirit) was published in 1968. The editors recommended 
the use of the tunes in the books they had used for the 
compilation: Church and Sunday School Hymnal , 1902; 
Church Hymnal , 1927; Life Songs 1, 1916; Life Songs 2, 
1938, and some British favorites, especially Sankey’s Sa¬ 
cred Songs and Solos. The translators often encountered 
accent problems. For example, “How Sweet the Name of 
Jesus Sounds” is in iambic rhythm (alternating light, 
heavy). In translation it became trochaic (alternating 
heavy, light), which would suggest that the tune ORTON- 
VILLE would not be suitable (Example 4). 

Example 4 


Mom tld name, of Je -SCL5 sahiitts 

J^-ruL ia - ke Ye ia -ynuu 

But congregations seem to be able to cope with what 
seems awkward to me. Perhaps traditional music of some 
ethnic groups has more rhythmic flexibility than is present 
in ORTONVILLE; accents may not be placed as strictly 
at beginnings of measures. In any case, Mennonite 
churches continue to use these translations. Congrega¬ 
tions do alter some musical details of their favorite hymns, 
adapting the music to their own hearing and values. Half 
steps and leading tones are not a part of the musical 
vocabulary of some groups, so congregations will remove 
them, substituting other notes, as in “Rock of Ages” at * 
(Example 5). 


Key changes may not appeal to them. The Nairobi 
Mennonite Church adds a second line to NICAEA, leav¬ 
ing out the accidental which pulls to a new key in the 
second phrase (Example 6). 

2. Innovations in hymnody have often come through the 
choirs. Bishop Kisare was supportive of choirs at a time 
when choirs were not permitted in worship in the 
missionaries’ home congregations. He wrote in his autobi¬ 
ography: 

I love music. Choirs are my delight. I try always to promote 
choirs. In our spiritual life conferences I give the young 
people a large part of the program for their choirs. Sunday 
morning worship is too dull if there is no choir to brighten 
the service. We all need each other in the church, each 
contributing his or her part according to the gifts and station 
which each has (Kisare 1984:99). 

I attended such a spiritual life conference at Shirati in 
1972. At each of the sessions, all eighteen choirs who came 
sang several numbers. Two choirs stand out especially in 
my memory. The first was a group of mature Luo women 
who sang in their vernacular rather than in Kiswahili. The 
resulting music could not follow Western rhythms or 
scales. The other choir of younger singers had the courage 
to add percussion: a metal ring struck by metal and a nail 
rubbed across the rings of a glass Fanta bottle. In both 
cases, the spontaneous response of the congregation was 
overwhelming, and high-pitched ululations broke out 
among the women in appreciation and approval. At my 
next visit to Tanzanian Mennonite churches in 1980, 
choirs were using drums and shakers as a matter of course. 

That gathering of choirs in 1972 was characterized 
further by suggestions of dance. A number of them 
entered down the aisle to the platform with a rhythmic 
processional until one of the worship leaders requested 
that they get to their special numbers with less expendi¬ 
ture of time. And the directors, with ornate batons, seemed 
to be dancing in front of their choirs; the usual Western, 
role of keeping the group together was not needed 
because the singers listened to each other intently and stood 
close enough to their neighbors to feel their breathing. 

3. Last August I visited a Maasai Mennonite congrega¬ 
tion which met under a large fig tree near Ogwedhi, 
Kenya. They sang from a book of texts published by the 
Christian Missionary Fellowship, a group which values and 
respects the culture of the people with whom they work. 
Many of the songs in this hymnal, Maisisa Enkai , they 
recorded on tape and made available to Maasai. The 
Mennonites sang one in solo-response style, with this 
refrain (Example 7). 

One of the members, Joseph Sangale, told me that the 
melody is an old Maasai song for the worship of special, 


Example 5 


Ifocjc of ft fee Ldvne hide mj-Stlf in Tife, Leftke u>a~fcrirtCic blrcd f fromtk^uzur-d^ 

Example 6 





a iao -Uj t lord 6xx (iVi tire our ±on^$tdlriseic> tfee 


54 


Example 7 



To [cl-SQT lo Iki-kou Li - no Y<£-su 01 - yw -t£ It Mfcaiov in-ib-ras. 


(Translation: Thanks be to God, who gave us Jesus, the first-born, as a sacrifice, by his mercy.) 


sacred trees or for unusually important people, such as the 
healer. The word ho-la-le-yio , he said, could not be 
translated; it is there like a “helping verb, to make the 
song sit.’’ 

The tune has characteristics similar to those of Maasai 
cattle songs; quick upward leaps at beginnings of phrases 
and a slower descent downward to a magnet-like lowest 
note. The fall of a fourth (as from doh to sol ) is a typical 
Maasai cadence. In fact, it is quite characteristic of cattle 
songs I have heard from other Kenyan groups. 

The text fits Maasai experience, with its motif of sacrifice 
and mention of sacred trees and the fly whisk (“holy tail”), 
symbol of authority: 


Example 8 continued 

2 2 

O God Creator gave his word. O Indhihiiyo dhegaha 

Called us to obey him too. iyo atarta adin 

He will then reward us. Asaga na siiye. 

Let us praise him! Praise him! Have aan ammanno. 

3 3 

O Those who on the Lord believe; O Intii eraygiisa 
He has made us each his child. addeedoo rumaysa 

God the Father loves us. Wu u abaalgudaye. 

Let us praise him! Praise him! Haye aan ammanno. 

4 

Tr. from Somali by Bertha Beachy O Intii aamtntoo dhan 
Adapt, by the editors. 1978. inamu ka yeel e, 

Haye aan ammanno. 


EEFRAiW: Ehoo looraon holaleyio 

Ashe naleng Enkai ai parmuain 

To lasar lo lkikau lino Yesu 

Oinoti le Nkai ai kiinug'iet Iyie intaras. 

1. Ayooki endaruna sirua pasae iruko enajo. 

I go in early morning. God hears me. 

2. Intaiki ntomonok o ilewa olasar lo lkikau Yesu. 

You give women and me a sacrifice of first-born: Jesus. , 

3. Inchoo enaisho o emukate raeyaKi erapuan lelo. 

Those who give bread, I will give life. 

4. Oong'arau to lng'ur le Yesu intaiki enashe Enkai. 

I receive the mercy of Jesus and give God thanks. 

5. Enkai nasai atasaiyia tokordu maa kisai. 

God (to be worshipped) help those who pray to vou. 

6. Tokordu oloiruko oleitu eiruk meibung'a osotua ng'ejuk. 

Help those wich faith and without - so hold the good news. 

7. Osotua lo inoti Yesu eitukuorieki ilasarri. 

The peace of Jesus Christ is the one that washed away all other sacrifices 

8. Neari te xnsalaba neitajeu pookin osuj. 

He was killed on the cross and saves whoever follows. 

9. Inyo tudurau inkonyek mirura olalashe ogol ong'u ening.. 

Stand up, open your eyes, you hard-hearted brother. 

10. Inyo isoraa Ilhebrania ooiirau eraatua e tomon. 

Stand, read Hebrews Chapter 12. • 

11. Ajo eiting'o ilasarri le nkop liyieng'ie intare olmong’ 

All sacrifices have ended, where you offer sheep and cows. 

12. Eiting'o entasim olchani orok meekure ekutu toki. 

The idol of the tree doesn't value anything. 

13. Osesen, osarge le Yesu, olasar lintaiki Enkai. 

The body and blood of Jesus is the sacrifice you give to God. 

14. Eitanapa Yesu ilenyena nemaiyian ile keper. 

Jesus commanded his followers and blessed the heaven. 

15. King'amunye olmumua sinyati olamal oiruko Enkai. 

We receive with a holy tail the teas who believe in God. 

4. Occasionally an original work in an indigenous style 
emerges from Mennonites in eastern Africa. One which 
the 1978 Mennonite World Conference Songbook intro¬ 
duced to North Americans is Haye aan ammanno (Klassen 
1990:No.8) (Example 8). 

Example 8 

▼•// Let us praise him! Praise him!// ▼•// Haye aan ammanno.// 

God the great Creator! Ilaahi na uumay 

Let us praise him! praise him! Haye aan ammanno. 

1 l 

O God Creator made us all. O Wu na eegayayo 

Ears and eyes and all four limbs. na ilaalivay e. 

Over us he watches. ilahi na liuntay 

Let us praise him! Praise him! Haye aan ammanno. 



It was composed by Adam J. Farah, whose early years 
were spent as a camel herder. An oral work like this will 
have varying versions of pitch in notation. This version 
corresponds closely to the way he sang it at Wichita in 
1978 and the way the believers in Mogadishu sang it in 
July 1986. 

These four stages do not necessarily occur in chrono¬ 
logical order from one to four; they may be simultaneous. 
The newer approaches are often additions to the contin¬ 
ued use of Western hymns in translation, and they repre¬ 
sent an enrichment of worship resources rather than a 
replacement of the earlier. However, the last two stages 
represent the more complete contextualization of musical 
style, and they offer enriching possibilities for the world¬ 
wide church. 

References cited 

Corbitt, Nathan 

1985 “The History and Development of Music in the Baptist 
Churches on the Coast of Kenya: The Development of an 
Indigenous Music, 1953-1984,” unpublished dissertation, Fort 
Worth, TX: Southwestern Baptist Seminary. 


55 











Kealy, John P. 

1972 “Catholic Progress with Traditional Music,” Kenya Churches 
Handbook, edited by David B. Barrett, et. al., Kisumu: Evangel 
Publishing House. 

Kidula, Jean 

1986 “The Effects of Syncretism and Adaptation on Christian Music 
of the Logoli,” unpublished dissertation, Greenville, NC: East 
Carolina University. 

Kisare, Marwa 

1984 Kisare, a Mennonite ofKiseru, Salunga, PA: Eastern Mennonite 
Board of Missions and Charities. 

Klassen, Doreen Helen 

1990 International Songbook, 2nd ed., Carol Stream, IL: Mennonite 


World Conference, Number 8. 

Lumko Song Book 

1984 Lumko Song Book, Lady Frere, Transkei: Lumko Music Depart¬ 
ment, Number 7. 

Maisisa Enkai 

1983 Maisisa Enkai, Nairobi: Christian Missionary Fellowship, Num¬ 
ber 136. 

Mbiti, John S. 

1972 “Preface,” Kenya Churches Handbook, edited by David B. 
Barrett, et. al., Kisumu: Evangel Publishing House. 

Mbungu, Stefan 

1967 “The Right Appreciation of Indigenous Music,” workshop paper 
for the Tanzania Conservatoire of Music, Dar es Salaam. 


William Wade Harris (1860-1929): 
African Evangelist and "Ethnohymnologist"' 

JAMES R. KRABILL 


Most Western missionaries down through the years have 
believed that music was an important part of Christian 
worship and should as such play a central role in the life 
of the faith communities taking shape as a result of their 
efforts. Unfortunately, many missionaries have worked 
under the assumption that “heathen” people could pro¬ 
duce only “heathen” music—which must be discarded— 
and that Western music being “Christian music” was the 
perfect replacement to fill the newly-created musical 
vacuum. 

It was no doubt this belief which inspired Rev. W. R. 
Stevenson to write with a considerable sense of achieve¬ 
ment already one century ago: 

The fact is that the best hymns of Watts, Doddridge, 
Cowper, Newton, Wesley, Heber, Lyte, Keble, Bonar, Miss 
Steele, Miss Havergal and other English authors—the best 
German hymns—the best hymns of American composition— 
are now sung in China and South Africa, in Japan and Syria, 
among the peoples of India, and in the isles of the Pacific 
Ocean—indeed, in almost every place where Protestant 
missionaries have uplifted the Gospel banner and gathered 
Christian Churches (Stevenson 1892:759). 

Four stages in the development of Africa's hymn 
traditions 

It is not surprising, given these views, that many of the 
hymn traditions utilized by churches in Africa and else¬ 
where around the world today have passed, or are cur¬ 
rently passing, through a number of stages in their 
development: 

STAGE 1: Importation (where hymn tunes and texts both 
originate with the missionary) 

Here, “the best hymns of Watts, Doddridge, Wesley and 
others” are simply taken over from the West and reproduced 
as accurately as possible in African worship contexts. Hymns 
at this stage may—with the passage of time—be “Africanized,” 
which for the tunes means introducing the use of drums, 
rattles and other locally-produced instruments, and for the 


Mennonite Board of Missions (MBM) workers James and Jeanette 
Krabill lived and worked among the Harrist people from 1978-88. 
Following a year in England at the University of Birmingham, 
where James completed a PhD. dissertation on the hymnody of 
the Harrist Church, James and Jeanette are currently on a 
three-year home assignment as mission educators for MBM. 


texts, translating them from Western into locally-spoken 
languages. Even these translated hymns, however—though 
perhaps more fully understood than those remaining in a 
“foreign” language—are really little more than “short-cuts,” 
“temporary stop-gaps” and in any case “from the point of view 
of their art, not the best” (Nketia 1962:119). For the problem 
with hymns (translated or non-translated) in Stage 1 is that 
they supplant the indigenous music system. And “music [being] 
a vital part of a people s identity... cannot be replaced without 
damage to the individual and to the society” (Chenoweth and 
Bee 1968:206). 

STAGE 2: Adaptation (where some part of the missionary’s 
hymn—tune or text—is replaced or otherwise significantly 
altered by an indigenous form) 

What happens here is more than a simple “translation” of 
Western tunes (with rattles) or texts (with language) into an 
African idiom; it is rather a total substitution of some part of 
the Western hymn (tune or text) by a tune or text of 
indigenous composition. This “adaptation” can take place in 
two ways: 1) where Western tunes are retained, but new, 
locally-written texts replace the Western ones; 2 or 2) where 
Western texts are retained and put to new, locally-composed 
tunes. 

STAGE 3: Imitation (where both the texts and tunes are 
locally composed, but the tunes are an imitation of 
Western melodies) 4 

STAGE 4: Indigenous composition (where both tunes 
and texts are locally produced) 

This stage should be, according to ethnohymnologists, “the 
goal” for churches in Africa for “when a people develops its 
own hymns with both vernacular words and music, it is good 
evidence that Christianity has truly taken root” (Chenoweth 
and Bee 1968:210). 

The majority of Africa’s churches, however, are still 
nowhere near having reached this point. In the spring of 
1987,1 was invited to attend a grandiose Sunday morning 
worship service bringing together over a thousand mem¬ 
bers of the Western District of Ivory Coast’s Methodist 
Church. Six choirs and one brass band performed a total 
of 37 hymns throughout the course of the nearly three- 
hour celebration. And of those 37 hymns, no less than 35 
were of the “imported” (Stage 1) variety—27 of these 
(including Handel’s “Hallelujah Chorus”) being further- 


56 


more reproduced in the French language, with the re¬ 
maining eight (including “Joy to the World”) translated 
into local languages. There were no “adapted” hymns, so 
far as I could tell, and only two fit the category of 
“indigenous compositions.” 

Africa’s independent churches have in many ways been 
the leaders in creating a modern African Christian hym- 
nology, yet even here it is surprising how many of these 
movements have simply “taken over” with them the 
hymnbooks of the parent mission churches from which 
they departed. Some independents have even dramati¬ 
cally increased over the years the number of Western 
hymns used in worship. The Church of the Lord (Aladura) 
is apparently such a case if one examines the historical 
development of the church’s hymnal: The 1932 edition 
contained a “Western hymn” to “original hymn” ratio of 
0 to 207; in the 1940 edition we find a ratio of 52 to 166; 
and by the time the third edition appeared in 1958, the 
tables had turned and the ratio had become 211 to 97 
(Turner 1967:296). 

There is, however, in both independent and mission- 
founded churches a kind of musical revival taking place 
in many parts of Africa today. This revival is producing an 
enthusiastic wave of spontaneous creativity which Adrian 
Hastings considered already in the late 1970s to be 
perhaps “the single most encouraging thing that has 
happened in African Christianity in this decade.” 6 “The 
time has come,” said a Methodist pastor on Ivory Coast’s 
national radio (March 18, 1984), “to make of our church 
an African church, to lay aside the foreign system imposed 
upon us by the missionaries, and to begin composing our 
own African hymns accompanied by our own African 
instruments!” 

While Western ethnomusicologists and African pastors 
and theologians are making urgent appeals for the cre¬ 
ation of more indigenous forms of worship throughout the 
continent, there is at least one African Church who 
remains little interested—if not slightly amused—by the 
whole debate. This is the Harrist Church of southern Ivory 
Coast—a church composed of second- and third-genera¬ 
tion descendants of the mass movement inspired by 
Liberian-born Prophet William Wade Harris during the 
first decades of this century. 

William Wade Harris, the prophet-evangelist 

When late in 1913 Prophet William Wade Harris left his 
native Liberia to begin his now well-known evangelistic 
campaign through southern Ivory Coast, he found himself 
confronted with a population having had little if any 
previous exposure to Christianity/ French Catholic mis¬ 
sionaries had for almost twenty years been working tire¬ 
lessly at establishing a credible and lasting presence in 
the area, but had met with limited success. And the only 
Protestant presence to speak of was to be found in small 
and scattered groups of African English-speaking clerks 
from Sierra Leone, the Gold Coast, Liberia, and Gambia, 
who had come to Ivory Coast, not as missionaries, but as 
agents of British trading companies doing business with 
the coastal peoples. 

The Prophet’s preaching, “fetish’-burning, and baptiz¬ 
ing ministry lasted a mere eighteen months until his 
expulsion from the colony in January 1915. The impact of 
that brief ministry, however, was most remarkable indeed, 
resulting in an estimated 100,000-200,000 persons turning 
from traditional religious beliefs and practices toward a 
new reality structured around certain rudimentary tenets 


of the Christian faith as prescribed by the Prophet: 
worship of the “one, true God”; weekly gathering on the 
seventh day for preaching, prayer, and singing; initial 
exposure to God’s law in the Ten Commandments and to 
the Lord’s Prayer; and the choosing of new “religious 
specialists” (preachers and twelve apostles) responsible in 
each village for watching over the general well-being of 
the church. 

Harris, the "ethnohymnologist" 

In general, the Prophet Harris was a “man on the move,” 
never lingering long in any one location. In some in¬ 
stances, villagers would travel long distances to see the 
Prophet, receive baptism from his hand, and then return 
home all in the same day. 

One of the questions frequendy asked of Harris by new 
converts during those brief encounters concerned the 
type of music which they were expected to sing once they 
arrived back home in their villages. “Teach us the songs 
of heaven,” they pleaded with the Prophet, “so that we 
can truly bring glory to God.” 

Now it is important to understand something of Harris’ 
background in order to appreciate his response to the 
thousands of new believers who crowded around him, 
clinging almost desperately to every word of counsel he 
could give them. Born of a Methodist mother in I860, 6 
William Wade Harris had spent over thirty-five years— 
nearly all of his pre-prophetic adult life (1873-1910)—at¬ 
tending and actively serving the “civilized” Methodist and 
Episcopal churches of eastern Liberia. Quite understand¬ 
ably, the Western hymn traditions which filled the litur¬ 
gies of these churches had come to be the sacred music 
dearly loved and cherished by Harris as well. When asked 
in 1978 whether Harris had any favorite hymns, the 
Prophet’s grandchildren recalled without hesitation, “Lo, 
He Comes with Clouds Descending” (his “favorite” hymn, 
which he sang repeatedly), “Guide Me, O Thou Great 
Jehovah,” “Jesus, Lover of My Soul,” “How Firm a Foun¬ 
dation, Ye Saints of the Lord,” and “What a Friend We 
Have in Jesus” (Shank 1980:597f, 1156f). 

Yet faced with the crowd seeking his advice on this most 
important matter, the Prophet refused easy answers. “I 
have never been to heaven,” he wisely told them, “so I 
cannot tell you what kind of music is sung in God’s royal 
village. But know this,” he continued, “that God has no 
personal, favorite songs. He hears all that we say in 
whatever language. It is sufficient for us to compose hymns 
of praise to him with our own music and in our own 
language for him to understand.” 

When asked further how exactly they were to proceed 
in composing these new “songs of God,” the Prophet told 
the people to begin by using the music and dance forms 
with which they were already acquainted. For the Dida 
people—one of the first and largest ethnic groups to feel 
the impact of the Prophet’s ministry—this represented a 
remarkable repertoire of at least thirty distinct classifica¬ 
tions of traditional musical genres, ranging from love 
ballads and funeral dirges to songs composed for hunting, 
rice planting, and rendering homage to wealthy commu¬ 
nity leaders. 9 

Not all musical genres, however, were suitable, accord¬ 
ing to the Prophet, for use in praising God. The following 
story from late 1913 describes how Harris helped the Dida 
people in the coastal village of Lauzoua to identify what 
kind of traditional music might best be used in hymn 
composition. 


57 



The Prophet requested a calabash (rhythmical instrument) 
from one of the women traveling with him and handed it to 
Dogbontcho, a well-known local female musician-composer. 
Dogbontcho in turn began singing for Harris a zlanje tune (a 
classification of traditional “love songs” among the Dida). 
When she had finished, Harris said, “That song does not honor 
God! Sing another kind!” 

This time Dogbontcho chose a dogblo tune (traditional 
“praise songs” of political or religious patronage): 

He who does not worship God will worship fetishes instead; 

But the day that God tells him: 

“Follow me and abandon your fetishes,” 

That day he will have to do what God commands him. 

The entire population of Lauzoua soon broke out in song 
joining in behind their lead singer. The Prophet himself, 
carried away by the rhythm of the music, climbed out of his 
canoe and began dancing. And then a miracle happened, for 
the paralytic Dogbontcho herself abandoned her cane and 
began dancing with the Prophet, accompanied by the entire 
population of Lauzoua now overcome with joy. 

Following this miracle, the Prophet counseled the people 
of Lauzoua to refrain henceforth from using their dogblo 
music for “profane” purposes, but to dedicate it instead to 
God, transforming it bit by bit and in such a way that it might 
bring glory to God. And this is how the traditional dogblo 
music of the Dida population of Lauzoua and Yocoboue 
became the sacred music of the church which took shape 
following the Prophet s coming to these parts. 1 


Setting the new faith to music 

Encouraged by these words of counsel and armed with 
the confidence that they were themselves capable of 
producing music acceptable to God, Dida composers set 
to work, expressing with great enthusiasm their new-found 
faith (Hymn DE25): 11 

We too, we have at last found our Father. 

We did not know that we were going to find our Father. 

But we have found our Father; 

Our Father is the King of Glory. 

One group of old men from the Dida village of Makey 
reported to me in 1984 that Harris, in his Lauzoua 
statement, had given two very specific guidelines for the 
composition of hymns: 1) that traditional “praise songs" 
(literally, songs which “hurl forth" or “shout out the name 
of someone") should be employed in the creation of new 
songs, intended now to bring praise to God; and 2) that 
much use should be made of “forgiveness language"—lan¬ 
guage ordinarily employed by an individual who “wishes 
to reestablish with some other person a relationship which 
has been broken or in some significant way greatly 
marred." 1 It is remarkable how many of the earliest 
Harrist hymns do in fact seem to express one or another 
aspect of these two themes of “praise" and “forgiveness." 

In the years which followed the Prophet s swift passage 
through southern Ivory Coast, Dida Harrist composers 
found other themes and developed additional music styles 
as they learned to read the Scriptures and grew in 
Christian understanding. My work with Dida leadership 
in collecting and transcribing Harrist hymns brought to 
light over 500 hymn texts spanning the 75-year period 
from 1913 to 1988. Since my departure from Ivory Coast 
two years ago, at least thirty new compositions have been 
added to the list. 


A model for today 

Studies in recent years made by missionary anthropolo¬ 
gists and Christian ethnomusicologists have increasingly 
insisted upon the following affirmations: 

1) That “although God exists totally outside of culture, while 
humans exist totally within culture, God chooses the cultural 
milieu in which humans are immersed as the arena for his 
interaction with people.” 13 

2) That Western culture with its particular musical traditions 
has been in the past and can be today “one such arena for 
God’s interaction with people.” Should, however, Western 
culture, Western languages, and Western music come to be 
perceived as the only or even preferred arena for God’s 
activity, then we are faced with a misconception which is “not 
only culturally stultifying but also theological heresy” (Friesen 
1981:ii-iii). 

3) That God can inspire and speak through every culture, 
every language and every music system (regardless of whether 
persons outside of that culture have an aesthetic response to it). 
To deny this is to deny the universality of God. 1 

The Prophet Harris never claimed to be a theologian, 
much less an ethnomusicologist or a cultural anthropolo¬ 
gist. But today s ethnohymnologists, trained in these dis¬ 
ciplines, could do worse if ever they were to choose him 
as their “patron saint." “God has no personal, favorite 
songs," he had told the Dida people at Lauzoua. “He hears 
all that we say in whatever language; it is sufficient for us 
to praise him in our own language for him to understand." 

Notes 

1. This article is based upon several sections from my disser¬ 
tation, The Hymnody of the Harrist Church Among the Dida of 
South-central Ivory Coast (1913-1949): An Historico-Religious 
Study , Ph.D. thesis, University of Birmingham (England), 2 vols., 
1989, 779 pp. 

2. For examples here, see W. J. Wallace, “Hymns in Ethiopia,” 
Practical Anthropology , 9 (November/December 1962), p. 271; 
and Mary Key, “Hymn Writing with Indigenous Tunes,” Practi¬ 
cal Anthropology , 9 (November/December 1962), pp. 258-259. 

3. Cf. Louis L. King, “Indigenous Hymnody in the Ivory 
Coast,” Practical Anthropology, 9 (November/December 1962), 
p. 269; lames M. Riccitelli, “Developing Non-Western Hym¬ 
nody,” Practical Anthropology, 9 (November/December 1962), 
pp. 251-254; lohn F. Carrington, “African Music in Christian 
Worship,” International Review of Mission, 37 (1948), p. 201. 

4. This stage is suggested by Rev. Richard Rakotondraibe in 
Donald Bobb’s “African Church Music” in Journey of Struggle, 
Journey of Hope, ed. by fane Heaton, New York: Friendship 
Press, 1983, p. 24. 

5. See B. G. M. Sundkler, Bantu Prophets in South Africa, 
London: Lutterworth Press, 1961 (1948, 1st ed.), p. 193, for the 
Zulu Zionists; J. Akinyele Omoyajowo, Cherubim and Seraphim: 
The History of the African Independent Church, New York: NOK 
Publishers International, Ltd., 1982, p. 159, for the Cherubim 
and Seraphim; and Harold W. Turner, African Independent 
Church, Vol. II, Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1967, p. 296, for the 
Church of the Lord (Aladura). 

6. Adrian Hastings, African Christianity, New York: Seabury 
Press, 1976, p. 52; also, by the same author, A History of African 
Christianity, 1950-1975 (African Studies Series, 26), Cambridge: 
Cambridge University Press, 1979, p. 235. 

7. The richest resource for bibliographical materials on the 
Prophet’s Ivory Coast ministry is David A. Shank, A Prophet of 
Modern Times: The Thought of William Wade Harris, West 
African Precursor of the Reign of Christ, Ph.D. thesis, University 
of Aberdeen (Scotland), 3 vols., 1980, 1180 pp. Cf. in particular 
Shank’s second chapter, more recently published as a separate 


58 


article in the Journal of Religion in Africa, XIV, 2 (1983), pp. 
130-160, which provides an historiographical survey of some 
180 items written on the subject over a sixty-five year period 
(1914-1980s). 

8. Harris’ date of birth has not been definitively established 
though Shank s proposal of 1860, accepted here, seems most 
convincing. 

9. For a complete listing here, cf. Krabill, The Hymnody, p. 176. 

10. For a fuller account of Harris’ advice to the Dida people 
of Lauzoua, see my article, “Dida Harrist Hymnody (1913- 
1990)” in Journal of Religion in Africa, XX, 2 (June 1990), pp. 
119-120. 

11. The code system used in collecting and classifying Dida 
Harrist hymns is described in my paper, “Collecting and Pre¬ 
serving Hymns: An Aspect of Ministry with AICs,” presented at 
the Kinshasa Pan-African Conference of Interdenominational 
Mission Agencies Relating to African Independent Churches, 
July 1-6, 1989. Conference papers are scheduled for publication 
early next year by Mennonite Board of Missions, Elkhart, 
Indiana. 

12. Interview with old men in the Dida village of Makey (April 
21, 1984). 

13. A quote from Charles Kraft in Martin Wroe, “Ancient and 
Modern: Church Music and the Culture Gap,” The Third Way 
(August 1985), p. 22. 


14. Cf. Vida Chenoweth, “Spare Them Western Music!” 
Evangelical Missions Quarterly 20, 1 (January 1984), p. 30. 

References Cited 

Chenoweth, Vida and Darlene Bee 

1968 “On Ethnic Music,” Practical Anthropology, 15 (September/Oc¬ 
tober). 

Friesen, Albert W. D. 

1981 “A Methodology in the Development of Indigenous Hymnody,” 
unpublished thesis, Fresno, CA: Mennonite Brethren Biblical 
Seminary. 

Nketia, J. H. Kwabena 

1962 “The Contribution of African Culture to Christian Worship,” in 
Christianity in Africa as Seen by the Africans, ed. by Ram Desai, 
Denver: Allan Swallow. 

Shank, David A. 

1980 A Prophet of Modem Times: The Thought of William Wade 
Harris, West African Precursor of the Reign of Christ, Ph.D. 
thesis, 3 volumes, Scotland: University of Aberdeen. 

Stevenson, W. R. 

1892 “Foreign Missions” in A Dictionary of Hymnology: Setting Forth 
the Origin and History of Christian Hymns of All Ages and 
Nations, John Julian (ed.), London: John Murray. 

Turner, Harold W. 

1967 African Independent Church, Vol. II, Oxford: Clarendon Press. 


Sing to the Lord a New Song 

MALCOLM WENGER 


Sing to the Lord a new song, 
for he has done marvelous things; 

his right hand and his holy arm 
have worked salvation for him. 

The Lord has made his salvation known 
and revealed his righteousness to the nations. 

He has remembered his love and his faithfulness 
to the house of Israel; 

all the ends of the earth 

have seen the salvation of our God. (Psalm 98:1-3) 

The Hebrew singer had gained a new understanding of 
God. A new song welled up from an overflowing heart. 
We may know almost nothing about the melodies, the 
rhythms, the intervals, or the musical structure of the song. 
But we can be sure that the forms used were not unfamiliar 
to those who heard the song. The singer may have combined 
those musical elements in a new way, but what was most 
important was a fresh realization of who God was and his 
purposes and actions in the world and among his people. 

Something similar has taken place as the Christian 
gospel has become known to Native American peoples 
such as the Comanche, Kiowa, Arapaho, Crow, and Chey¬ 
enne. New thoughts about God and his ways have resulted 
in new songs using traditional musical forms and the 
language of the people. Intertribal “camp meetings” in 
Oklahoma became the setting where such indigenous 
hymnody was shared with Christians from neighboring 
tribes and often translated or the basic idea reworded in 
the new language. 

Malcolm Wenger lived among the Northern Cheyenne Indians in 
Montana from 1944-66 and was a pioneer in recording Native 
American hymns. As chair of Indian Ministries for General 
Conference Mennonite Church, he helped to set up the Mennonite 
Indian Leaders Council. Malcolm and his wife, Esther, have also 
served as interim pastors in cross-cultural settings. 


In many tribes the use of native musical forms was either 
discouraged or Christians themselves decided not to use 
their own forms. Hopi Christians expressed concern for 
the Cheyenne usage of their native music in Christian 
worship. Translations of Anglican and United Church 
hymnals into Indian languages seem to dominate Christian 
music in many native churches in Canada. 

The Baptist missionaries who first came among the 
Kiowa of Oklahoma encouraged new Christians to de¬ 
velop their own music, and as a result a rich tradition of 
several hundred “church songs” developed. Mennonite 
missionaries have been more ambiguous. Rodolphe Petter, 
in spite of his unshakable conviction that the Word of God 
must be communicated in the Cheyenne language, saw 
red flags signaling syncretism when the same gospel was 
expressed in indigenous musical forms. Lois Barrett quotes 
from a letter Petter wrote to his wife after Harvey 
Whiteshield from Oklahoma, his initial helper in language 
work, visited the Montana Cheyenne churches in 1942 and 
introduced Christian songs to Cheyenne tunes rather than 
the German and English tunes which Petter used and loved. 

Our Cheyenne songs, he [Whiteshield] simply discarded 
and tried ... to introduce only his pet new Cheyenne songs, 
which are not the spiritual food or expression which growing 
Christians should have. They catch the Indians simply because 
their tune is like that of the heathen and peyote people. Tell 
our Cheyenne that the Sundance is a kind of spiritual, 
sacrificial replica of Christ’s Passion, tell them that the Whites 
killed Jesus, tell them all the Scripture passages which are a 
pillow for them; sing their tunes etc., etc., do never mention 
things that hurt them, then, of course they will like it. Is that 
Christ’s Gospel? Has such a message made the Oklahoma 
Indians morally better (1983:31)? 

In spite of Petter s opposition, these indigenous songs 
were sung at family gatherings, home prayer meetings, 
wakes, funerals, and camp meetings. The hymns translated 


59 


by Petter from German and English were usually used in 
church services. However, missionary J. B. Ediger—who 
served at Clinton and Hammon, Oklahoma—developed a 
deep appreciation for indigenous songs and about 1930 
began to encourage their use in services. 

Use and development of indigenous Christian songs was 
slow in Montana. During my years of living with the 
Northern Cheyenne, from 1944 to 1966, I was at first 
unaware of such music. It was James and Julia Shoulder- 
blade who introduced me to songs that they learned from 
Oklahoma Christians. Not knowing of previous opposition, 
I was excited to discover this indigenous hymnody and 
began to record some of the songs on tape and try to learn 
them. 

It seemed to me that if the Christian faith were sung in 
native forms it could be much more readily received and 
understood. The Holy Spirit which God had promised to 
his children would surely guide the Cheyenne Christians 
in their choices of how to present the faith in song. Later 
visits to Montana by John Heap of Birds and Homer Hart 
enabled us to record additional songs. As I began to 
understand the texts of the songs, they seemed to me 
worthy of widespread use, and I began to think of making 
taped copies available with the possible publication of a 
new hymnbook that would include them. 

In 1964, James Bixel, professor of music at Bluffton 
College, took a summer leave of absence to study Christian 
hymnody among the Cheyenne and the Hopi, with the 
thought of encouraging the expression of Christian faith 
in native forms of music and art. He recorded Southern 
Cheyenne indigenous Christian songs, and encouraged 
Hopi Christians to develop their own hymnody. He later 
made his recordings available for a Cheyenne hymnbook 
project. 

In 1974, trained musician David Graber and his wife, 
Bonnie, arrived in Busby, Montana. David became inter¬ 
ested in Cheyenne music. That fall he went to Oklahoma 
to record more indigenous hymns available there. 
Through David s work and with assistance on texts pro¬ 
vided by Wayne and Elena Leman, Wycliffe Bible Trans¬ 
lators assigned to the Northern Cheyenne in 1975, a 
hymnbook of indigenous songs began to take shape. It was 
published in 1982 as Tsese-Ma’heone-Nemeototse , Chey¬ 
enne Spiritual Songs by Faith and Life Press, Newton, 
Kansas. 

This hymnbook reflects the response of Indian people 
to the story of the gospel as they heard it. The fact that 
these songs were opposed by missionaries or not included 
in the “official” songbook used in worship adds credibility 
to the message they contain as a window on the past. Of 
the 161 songs in the book, 90 of them have texts written 
by Cheyenne people. A few are translations of songs from 
other tribal languages or from English. These songs have 
been kept alive in the hearts and minds of people, some 
for perhaps as long as 80 years. 

Of these 90 songs written by Cheyenne people, what 
did Cheyenne Christians choose to sing about? How did 
they describe the Christian gospel and changes it brings 
about? What important Christian teachings did they in¬ 
clude or omit? Following are illustrations from the literal 
English translations included in Cheyenne Spiritual Songs 
(CCS) although in a few instances the word order is 
slightly changed to be less awkward in English. 

Some of these songs are quite old. One of them is 
attributed to a man who died approximately the year that 
I was born and is sung to an Arapaho melody: 


Great Chief Jesus, Great Chief Jesus 

I was happy when to your way I came. 

Jesus with your mercy clothe me! 

(Two Crows, CSS 24) 

Songs were usually short but were repeated several 
times. A leader would start a song without announcing it 
and the groups would join in. Some of the very short ones 
still carry much meaning: 

A Christian says, “My Father loves me.” 

He is right. 

(Traditional Cheyenne giveaway song, CSS 84) 

My heavenly Father, I love you. 

I love you very much. 

I love you. 

(Maude Fightingbear, CSS 81) 

One of the themes that runs through many of the songs 
is joy, praise, and thanksgiving to God: 

Let’s praise God that with his great power 

He leads us daily! “Thank you,” we say to God. 

When I was lost here on earth, 

God was merciful to me too. 

To God I prayed, he helped me, he saved me. 

(Belle Wilson Rouse, CSS 9) 

Thank you Jesus for leading us. 

Your Godliness makes us rejoice every day. 

Thank you, Jesus, for being merciful to us. 

(Frances Goose, CSS 131) 

Who is the God to whom the Cheyenne Christians sing? 
When we share the gospel in a new culture, there is 
sometimes anxiety to know what name to use for “God.” 
The Hopi know of several divine beings, none which seem 
appropriate to use as the name for the God revealed in 
Jesus. Finally the English word “God” was borrowed. 

The Cheyenne used the name Malfieo’o , or in the plural 
Maheono, for the supernatural beings or forces or myster¬ 
ies to whom they prayed. Cheyenne Christians did not 
hesitate to use Malfieo’o for “God.” But note how carefully 
they defined who he is: 

My God is the Most High. 

He is the Truth and the Light. 

He sits as chief in the highest heaven. 

He has power and glory. 

My God is truly the one to be thanked 

Because he is merciful and lovingly kind. 

My God is truly alive. 

He is the one who gave us eternal life. 

(Maude Fightingbear, CSS 8) 

Other songs say that Maheo’o is the true God (CSS 12), 
the one who made heaven and earth (CSS 11), the one 
who sent his Son to save us (CSS 26), and our Father 
above, the First One (CSS 95). 

Who then is Jesus? 

Jesus is God. 

On earth His way is the only good way. 

Follow it! 

He will take you through where it is difficult. 

He will have mercy on you. 

(Cheyenne hymn, CSS 49) 

Jesus is the one who calls us. 

Come! Walk the way that he does! 

It is the only true way. 

(Old Colony camp meetings, CSS 50) 


60 


Jesus is the source of salvation (CSS 26), of cleansing 
(CSS 38), of help (CSS 2), of guidance and daily care (CSS 
24), of refuge (CSS 114), of a good life on earth (CSS 46), 
and of a heavenly home (CSS 57). He is worthy of prayer 
(CSS 19), praise (CSS 18), honor (CSS 16), and thanks¬ 
giving (CSS 109). The names “Jesus” and “God” are used 
interchangeably in some songs (cf. CSS 122). 

Salvation is described as deliverance from sin and being 
made into a new person (CSS 74), being chosen (CSS 96), 
being lost and then led (rather than found) (CSS 98), 
being clothed with the Holy Spirit (CSS 76), or with Jesus 
the Victor: 

The Lord gave me His Son. 

He clothed me with the Victor. 

That’s why I am happy. 

(Maude Fightingbear, CSS 30) 

But by far the most frequent picture of the Christian 
life is that of the journey, of walking on Jesus’ way. At least 
21 songs include this imagery: 

Jesus’ way alone is good. 

It alone is true. Accept it! 

Rejoice because of it every day! 

The Holy Spirit will lead you. 

(Cheyenne Hymn CSS 79) 

God, I too have taken your way. 

Be merciful to me! 

Whenever I sin, renew my mind! 

Stand with me! 

(Cheyenne Hymn CSS 68) 

A popular song by John Heap of Birds has become 
known as the “Baptismal Song” from its frequent use in 
that setting: 

Jesus, I have come to your way. Welcome me! 

I am walking, I am ready. 

Thank you, I tell you, that you will save me. 

(CSS 62) 

The one becoming a Christian is expected to be actively 
walking with Jesus. The Christian life is faith in action. 
The word “church” does not occur in these songs. Yet it 
is clear that the Christian life involved the coming together 
of a people in response to an invitation from Jesus. As they 
approach God together, they rejoice and praise him. 

Jesus, we rejoice to gather together with you. 

You have called us. “I am the way,’’ you say to us. 

Lead us well in your way! 

(John Heap of Birds, CSS 1) 

Let us approach God! Let us approach God! 

He is the one who is the true God. 

Let us rejoice! Let us praise God’s name! 

(Bell Wilson Rouse, CSS 5) 

Our friend Jesus, our friend Jesus, 

He invites us, he invites us. 

Come together! Come together! 

Jesus calls us, come! 

(Attr. to Mrs. Bear Bow, CSS 3) 

Some thirty songs offer guidance and resources for 
living the Christian life. 

Discipleship is encouraged: 

Jesus is the one who calls us. 

Come! Walk the way he does! 

It is the only true way. 

(Old Colony Camp meetings, CSS 50) 


In hardship, we ask God not to be exempted, but to go 
with us: 

God, look upon us! Be merciful to us! 

We carry your name. 

Bring us through, even though it is difficult! 

By your divine power we are victors. 

Be merciful to us! 

(Frances Goose, CSS 124) 

We ask for help in temptation and sin: 

Lord have mercy on me! Help me! 

I’m walking in dangerous places. 

(Maude Fightingbear, CSS 130) 

Jesus, we go to you for refuge 

We are asking you with joyfulness 

Give us clear thinking in our lives. 

(John Heap of Birds, CSS 114) 

Jesus, I am depending on you. 

I’m slow at learning your way, 

The good way which you gave us. 

Yet, I ask, be merciful to me. 

I just wait for you, Jesus. 

(John Heap of Birds, CSS 136) 

A song of prayer says: 

I thought about him in the morning, 

Since today, Jesus’ day, the good day, has come. 

I prayed to him this morning. 

It made me happy to think about Jesus. 

(Harry Starr, CSS 19) 

I found no songs about service to others, about offering 
a cup of cold water in Jesus’ name. One possible reference 
to prophetic justice is found in CSS 54 attributed to Belle 
Rouse, “The high place will be put down.” 

There are many songs in which the evangelistic invita¬ 
tion is extended to ask others to consider the Jesus road. 
For example: 

Take the Savior as your friend! 

His way is the only good way. 

His story is the only true way. 

All over the world it has spread. 

(Newakis Lamebull, CSS 55) 

Newakis worked as an informant at sessions of the 
Summer Institute of Linguistics. Her students scattered 
all over the world and many wrote to tell her of their work 
of Bible translation. From her I first heard the Cheyenne 
language. 

Singing was a culturally appropriate way among the 
Cheyenne to honor someone. The announcer called for a 
song in recognition of someone. The honored one danced 
in formal procession around the circle. In about 1910, 
Watan, a Cheyenne-speaking Arapaho, adapted this tra¬ 
ditional honor song for use in honoring Jesus. 

Sing an honor song to Jesus! 

Sing an honor song to Jesus! 

Now take his word! 

Now follow his way! 

Praise Jesus’ name! 

Praise Jesus’ name! 

(Old Colony, CSS 16) 

Sometimes the Cheyenne appointed children to honor¬ 
ary positions of responsibility in the community. Someone 
else did the work but the child might be honored as the 
holder of the position by the giving of a valuable gift to a 


61 




stranger or visitor. In this song, God honors Jesus by 
seeking a stranger to whom God can give eternal life. To 
the traditional giveaway song (verse 1), Josephine 
Glenmore has added two verses using this custom to 
explain the Christian gospel. "Stranger,” literally "trav¬ 
eler,” by spiritual application can mean anyone not yet on 
God’s road and part of God s family. The handshake 
acknowledges the gift. 

A stranger, I’m looking for one. 

For the sake of my child I’m looking for one. 

A stranger, I am looking for one. 

I am going to give away to him eternal life. 

Stranger, I am looking for you. 

I am going to give away to you, come shake my hand. 

(CSS 58) 

And finally a few songs about heaven and the second 
coming of Jesus. 

Perhaps the time is near 

When the Lord Jesus will come back again. 

Get ready! Watch, and pray all the time! 

(Maude Fightingbear, CSS 42) 

David Graber explains in a note to the following song 
that Stacy Wolfchief, also known as Afraid of Beavers, was 
a Cheyenne who married into the Kiowa tribe and learned 
the Kiowa language. He originally made this as a Kiowa 
hymn, and Frances Goose, his niece, translated it into 
Cheyenne. It has often brought comfort and hope in time 
of grief. 

Jesus, open the door for us 

When we also come to the kingdom, the beautiful land! 

Jesus, welcome us! We will arrive rejoicing 

At the eternal kingdom, at the eternal kingdom. 

(CSS 148) 

Perhaps the best known of the songs about heaven is 
called "Howling Water s Song.” Others think it was Alfrich 


Heap of Birds who—died in 1922—who first sang it. These 
songs are looked upon not as personal creations but as 
gifts from God. 

It is the most beautiful place above 
Where Jesus has gone to prepare for us. 

Let’s praise him every day 
Because he prepared it well for us. 

(CSS 145) 

Finally a song that leaves us with a searching question is 
based on 1 Peter 3:1-18: 

Someday all heaven and earth will be destroyed. 

And when Jesus comes, we will all see him. 

And how shall we answer him? 

(Soar Woman, CSS 39) 

How shall we answer him? 

With the exception of songs about service and justice 
these indigenous Cheyenne spiritual songs give a broad 
coverage of Christian teaching. The omissions may have 
been on the part of their teachers. 

Earlier this year when the Cheyenne church at Seiling, 
Oklahoma, and the Arapaho church at Canton, Oklahoma, 
ordained Newton and Amelia Old Crow, Christians wear¬ 
ing traditional dress sang praise to God using traditional 
musical forms in the Arapaho, Cheyenne, Crow, and 
Kiowa languages. Perhaps the "musical barrier,” as well as 
the language barrier, is not as high as it once was 
(Chenoweth 1968). 

References cited 

Barrett, Lois 

1983 The Vision and the Reality , Newton, KS: Faith and Life Press. 
Chenoweth, Vida and Darlene Bee 
1968 “On Ethnic Music,’’ Practical Anthropology, (September/Octo¬ 
ber) 205-212. 

Graber, David, ed. 

1983 Tsese-Ma’heone-Nemeototse, Cheyenne Spiritual Songs, Newton, 
KS: Faith and Life Press. 


Experiencing Native American Music: 

Living with Cheyenne and Crow Indians 

DAVID GRABER 


Experiences 

In August 1973, I received a call from Ted Risingsun, a 
school board member at Busby School, to interview for a 
music teaching job on the Northern Cheyenne reserva¬ 
tion. In less than two weeks, I moved with my family to 
Busby, Montana. We arrived in time for the Busby pow¬ 
wow. The community gathered for a "family reunion” with 
singing and dancing every night. My children and I heard 
and felt the drum beat from our home a half mile away. 
As a musician, I was compelled to get closer. I took a tape 
recorder and recorded comments: "The songs all sound 
alike— They sing out of tune— The meter of the song 
is out of sync with the beat of the drum.... There must 
be lots of improvisation or carelessness in singing.” 


David Graber teaches music at the high school in Lodge Grass, 
Montana, where 90 percent of the students are Crow Indians. He 
and his family live in Hardin, Montana. 


I tried to be respectful, but couldn’t relate well to what 
I was hearing. 

Months later an audio album arrived with Native Amer¬ 
ican music arranged for classroom music teaching. I taught 
my students some Eskimo and Creek songs, and soon 
grandmothers were asking me, "Where did you get those 
Indian songs? Why don’t you teach them our Cheyenne 
songs?” I began visiting elders who were glad to sing 
Cheyenne songs appropriate for children to learn in 
school. I started a small collection of recordings and began 
writing down some of the songs. I was invited to sing with 
a native drum group at powwows and, with some patient 
coaching, I began to unlearn tempered scale interval 
tuning, attachment of metric parameters like a "down 
beat” to the drum accompaniment. Basically what I 
thought was accident or improvisation was in reality 
essential to the songs—all this, of course, from musicians 
who had little or no formal training in European music. 


62 



Within the first months of our arrival, we attended a 
gathering of the Mennonite churches on the reservation, 
and I heard an elder gentleman sing a Christian song 
unlike any I had ever heard. James Shoulderblade, the 
singer, introduced me to the tradition of Cheyenne indig¬ 
enous hymns; eventually James became an important 
contributor to the Cheyenne hymnbook. 

The following year I learned to know Malcolm Wenger, 
one of the few missionaries to Native American people 
who valued and encouraged indigenous hymnody. He 
asked me to come to a conference of Mennonite Indian 
church leaders (MILC) in Oklahoma with a tape recorder. 
He and James Shoulderblade knew that the tradition of 
indigenous hymnody was being lost. He shared with me 
his dream of a hymnbook that would contain indigenous 
hymns alongside those translated by Rodolphe Petter, a 
Mennonite missionary who opposed indigenous hymnody 
among the Cheyenne. I went to Oklahoma, where the 
response to the project was generous. Elders encouraged 
the work and contributed songs. 

In 1978, my family and I moved to Kansas. There work 
with Cheyenne in Oklahoma could proceed more easily. 
I made several trips to Oklahoma, meeting with people 
who contributed songs and historical information about 
the songs. Lawrence Hart, a Cheyenne Mennonite min¬ 
ister and traditional chief, and his wife, Betty, hosted my 
wife and me in Clinton. They also coordinated meetings 
to work on the hymns. Nine years later, in 1982, the 
Cheyenne hymnbook, Tsese-MaTieone-Nemeototse , was 
published, containing 160 hymns. At first it was going to 
be just a photocopied, loose-leaf notebook of songs. But 
with the urging of Ted Risingsun, the Northern Cheyenne 
Mennonite Leaders Council representative, and others, 
the committee decided to publish it with a hardback, so 
it would have the solid look and feel of most other 
hymnbooks. 

Just this summer I completed the audio masters for a 
four-cassette album with recordings of all the hymns. 
Nearly all the indigenous hymns in the album are copies 
of the original recordings from which I wrote the indige¬ 
nous hymns in the hymnbook. These are available from: 
The Northern Cheyenne Mennonite Churches, Box 72, 
Busby, MT 59016. 

The hymnbook was well received in Montana, where 
Rodolphe Petter had so long opposed the indigenous 
hymns. The Cheyenne in Montana had learned and still 
love Petter’s translated hymns, but these do not speak like 
the hymns that use music familiar to the Cheyenne and 
other Plains Indian people. 

Writing down this oral tradition presented those of us 
involved in the project with complex issues, some of them 
hard to resolve. There was initially some opposition and 
even hostility from certain Native American traditionalists. 
In Oklahoma, the tradition remains oral, but there is 
growing interest in using the hymnbook. Lyle Redbird was 
commissioned by Mrs. Belle Wilson Rouse before she died 
nearly twenty years ago to continue the tradition of 
indigenous oral hymns she had so patiently taught along 
with her preaching and healing ministry. At first it ap¬ 
peared that Lyle s mission would be in conflict with the 
written hymns. Recently Lyle has been contributing to 
the hymnbook work and using the hymnbook in his own 
ministry. 

In 1984, I was invited by some Crow Indian members 
of a Bible translation group to come back to Montana to 
work on developing the first Crow Indian hymnbook. 


Although the Crow people have a long tradition of oral 
hymnody, they have not had a hymnbook in their own 
language. We moved to Hardin, Montana, where I am 
continuing to teach music in a local public high school on 
the Crow reservation. 

My work with the Crow hymnbook project began with 
recording and archiving the recordings, and continues 
with writing the hymns for a hymnbook. A decision was 
made early this summer by the committee to separate the 
traditional hymns from the translated hymns, and to 
publish the first volume this summer or fall. As of October, 
the pages of the first volume of 48 hymns have been 
printed out with a laser printer, and when the cover and 
a historical narrative are completed, this will be published. 
I have also just completed audio masters for a cassette 
album of the songs in this hymnbook. The committee is 
looking for resources to produce this album so it is 
available along with the hymnbook. 

Observations 

Most, if not all, American tribal groups that accepted 
Christianity initially responded with songs at home in their 
own culture. But the grammar of Native American music, 
with its glottals, pitch bends, and complex rhythmic 
structure and drum beat with no meter, was heard by 
Europeans to lack essential elements for hymn tunes. It 
was considered primitive, if not pagan. 1 Few missionaries 
gave their Native American converts consent to exercise 
creative musical traditions in a Christian way. Without 
those few there would be almost no authentic indigenous 
Native American hymnody. Apparently a few Baptist 
missionaries were the first to give free rein to Kiowa 
people of Oklahoma to sing and use their own music and 
texts for hymns. Jacob B. Ediger in Oklahoma and Mal¬ 
colm Wenger in Montana were among those Mennonites 
who encouraged use of such songs among Cheyenne and 
Arapaho in worship services. 

But it has taken a long time to give them the same status 
as European hymns. Except for a few indigenous hymns 
in South Dakota among the Ogallala, I know of no other 
indigenous hymnody outside of those tribes exposed to 
the tradition in Oklahoma that arose with the consent of 
missionaries. 

I think most tribal Christians, with a strong tradition of 
song-making, tried to make their own Christian songs 
modeled on the European pattern. They usually encoun¬ 
tered a credibility problem. These songs were called 
“attempts to imitate” Christian hymns. 2 

In spite of this, indigenous hymnody flourished in 
Oklahoma. Tent camp meetings were from early in this 
century an important setting for encouraging Christian 
evangelism as well as learning and sharing hymns. To this 
day, when camp meetings are held, representatives of 
different tribes are called on to share songs in their own 
tradition and language. These songs have been learned 
and translated for other tribes. Cheyenne and Crow 
singers often acknowledged to me that their hymn was 
originally a Kiowa hymn. There was also sharing of hymns 
among other tribes, especially the Comanche, Arapaho, 
and Sioux. To my knowledge, Native American indigenous 
hymnody was effectively throttled and disappeared—if it 
existed—among nearly all North American tribes except 
for these few Plains tribes. 

Joe Medicine Crow, tribal historian and anthropologist 
who serves on the Crow Hymnbook Committee, estimates 
that there are over 200 indigenous Crow hymns. Many of 


63 



these are personal songs, and may be shared and sung by 
an individual in public testimony. Public singing may or 
may not lead to group singing of the song. Certainly, many 
Crow hymns remain a private expression of prayer and 
praise to God. 

Since 1973, I have acquired respect and appreciation 
for the tradition of hymnody God has given Native Amer¬ 
ican people. I am aware that what I have learned is a small 
part of what has been and what could still be, were there 
less cultural arrogance among those of the dominant 
European culture. 

Music is only one of many cultural items still easily 
misunderstood and misused by persons of the dominant 
culture. In all these issues, careful listening and waiting 
for guidance to emerge from the people themselves is best. 
Native American Christians in this country have widely 
varying views regarding their own traditions and culture. 
Very few answers of what music, dance, or ceremonies are 
appropriate for a Christian can be applied to other Chris¬ 
tians. St. Paul’s refusal to compromise on the “high calling 
of God in Christ Jesus” is mistakenly applied to a variety 
of musical and cultural matters by different Native Amer¬ 
ican people, depending on their own tribal or missionary 


tradition. This variety and the strength of local opinions 
is not unlike that of the Mennonite tribes. 

A temptation of some is to “turn back the cultural clock” 
and try to teach Indian culture to Indian Christians. While 
the intentions are better than the mission efforts fifty years 
ago, the results are the same because the cultural expres¬ 
sions are still manipulated and not free. We must each 
trust the other’s ability to hear God speak in the appro¬ 
priate media. All we can do is share, through our own gifts, 
our joy in discovering God who is alive and present to us 
in all our affairs. 

It has been heartening to me to see some increased 
appreciation for this beautiful, God-sent tradition of music 
that has come to Native American people. I have gained 
much in being part of this reawakening. 

Notes 

1. See Rodolphe Petter’s letter to the Mennonite General 
Conference around 1940 in the archives at Bethel College, 
Newton, Kansas. 

2. Robert Lowie was commenting on the wax cylinder record¬ 
ing he made of Crow music in the 1930s, archived in the Lowie 
Museum, Berkeley, California. 


64 


In Review 


Cross and Sword: An Eyewitness History 
of Christianity in Latin America. Edited 
by H. McKennie Goodpasture. Maryknoll, 
NY: Orbis Books, 1989, 314 pp., $12.95 (pb) 

Reviewed by Glendon Klaassen 

The uniqueness of this book is described 
by the subtitle. It is not an interpretive 
study, but a primary source of original 
documents telling the story of five hun¬ 
dred years of Christian church history in 
Latin America. Editor Goodpasture is pro¬ 
fessor of church history and mission studies 
at Union Theological Seminary in Rich¬ 
mond, Virginia. 

The timing of this book is most appropri¬ 
ate as Latin Ajnerica commemorates in 
1992 the five-hundred-year anniversary 
since the “discovery” of the Americas by 
Europeans, who also brought Christianity 
to the region. I was introduced to this 
volume by Samuel Escobar, a Peruvian 
friend teaching at Eastern Baptist Semi¬ 
nary. He values this book, and I concur 
with his recommendation. This volume is 
for all involved in Latin America who wish 
to understand the reasons behind current 
developments. 

This is a fascinating and illuminating 
collection of documents that give perspec¬ 
tive to the general, historical developments 
as well as occasional specific local and 
regional histories as narrated by 118 wit¬ 
nesses. Beginning with a journal entry from 
Spain by Christopher Columbus in 1492 
and spanning the five centuries in an 
interview with a Lutheran missionary in 
Peru in 1983, these pages offer a great 
variety of reports and stories. Some are told 
with deep feeling that illicits profound 
reflections from the reader. These are 
witnesses of coercion and exploitation, and 
also of care and concern; of minority con¬ 
trol over majority; of horrors and ecstacies; 
but all deal with the lives of people. 

Goodpasture divides this book into three 
major periods of development whose 
boundaries have political and ecclesiastical 
significance: 1) the years 1492-1808 rep¬ 
resent the colonial era and Roman Catholic 
dominance; 2) 1808-1962 represent reli¬ 
gious diversity with a diminishing role of 
Roman Catholicism; and 3) 1960-1985 
represent liberation struggles. Each period 
is subdivided into shorter segments. For 
each division as well as for each of the 
documents, Goodpasture gives a helpful 
introduction identifying source, date, and 
context. 

It is difficult to be critical with a book 
that presents primary source materials with 


little interpretation or evaluation. For all 
who wish to understand the Latin America 
situation, especially the religious scene of 
both Roman Catholic and Protestant faith, 
this book is essential. The rapid changes 
taking place today in Latin America must 
always be informed by such contextualized 
understandings. As the celebrations of the 
500 years begin, it is appropriate to reflect 
on the “multitude of people ... consumed 
... spreading destruction over the whole 
hemisphere ...” as B. de las Casas recorded 
in 1540 (p. 11). 

Would not repentance and relinquishing 
control be even more appropriate than 
celebration for what happened and for 
what continues to shape the social, eco¬ 
nomic, political, and spiritual legacy of 
Latin America? 


Glendon Klaassen is employed by General 
Conference Mennonite Commission on 
Overseas Mission in Newton, Kansas. 

Liberating News: A Theology of Contex¬ 
tual Evangelization. By Orlando E. Costas. 
Grand Rapids, MI: William B. Eerdmans, 
1989, 189 pp., $12.95 (pb) 

Reviewed by Erwin Rempel 

The manuscript for this book was com¬ 
pleted in 1987 just before the untimely 
death of its author, Orlando E. Costas, at 
age 45. He authored several books includ¬ 
ing The Church and Its Mission (Tyndale, 
1974), The Integrity of Mission (Harper & 
Row, 1979), and Christ Outside the Gate 
(Orbis, 1982). 

“The practice of evangelization has been 
the passion of my ministerial career...” are 
the words Orlando s wife, Rose L. 
Feliciano Costas, found scribbled on a 
piece of paper as Orlando, still in the 
hospital, began to prepare the book’s pref¬ 
ace. This passion is reflected throughout 
the book. 

The book’s purpose is to call the church 
to holistic evangelization. Costas engages 
in “a constructive, critical, contextual theo¬ 
logical reflection on evangelization as a 
prophetic and apostolic task in the light of 
Scripture as a prophetic and apostolic 
text.” 

Of interest to Anabaptist readers is 
Costas’ claim that the book is informed by 
a radical evangelical tradition with roots in 
the Anabaptist emphasis on evangelical 
ethics. It is also “informed by the experi¬ 
ence of oppressed racial minority Chris¬ 
tians in North America who are in 
solidarity with other oppressed groups and 


poor minorities of the two thirds world.” 

This book represents Costas’ final minis¬ 
try to those engaged in global mission and 
is recommended for reading to missionaries, 
missiologists, and mission administrators. 


Erwin Rempel is executive secretary of the 
Commission on Overseas Mission for the 
General Conference Mennonite Church, lo¬ 
cated in Newton, Kansas. 


Health , the Bible and the Church: Biblical 
Perspectives on Health and Healing. By 
Dr. Daniel E. Fountain. Wheaton, IL: Billy 
Graham Center, Wheaton College, 1989, 
228 pp., (pb) 

Reviewed by Jake Friesen 

Dr. Daniel E. Fountain holds an M.D. 
degree from the University of Rochester 
School of Medicine and a Masters of Public 
Health from Johns Hopkins University. He 
and his wife, Miriam, have served at the 
Vanga Evangelical Hospital in Zaire since 
1961. 

The stated purpose of this monograph is 
to contrast the secular and biblical 
worldview of our current practices of med¬ 
icine and health; to study important principles 
of the biblical faith and their implications for 
Christian ministries of health and healing; to 
discover how to communicate effectively these 
principles to those who hold the worldview of 
another cultural perspective; and to plan strat¬ 
egies for the church to promote health and 
healing. 

He accomplishes these purposes well by 
developing a theology of wellness that in 
many ways rebukes his own profession and 
at the same time summons churches to 
recover their rightful role as partners with 
physicians in working toward God’s plan of 
wholeness for themselves and those 
around them. Local congregations are en¬ 
couraged to develop a ministry of healing 
based on solid biblical foundations with a 
concern for the whole person. 

The book challenges readers to rethink 
today’s assumptions and practices of med¬ 
ical services both at home and abroad; it 
should be read by every Christian physi¬ 
cian, health worker, and those interested 
in health issues and concerns. 


Jake Friesen, a medical doctor now in pri¬ 
vate practice in Reedley, California, was a 
medical missionary in India from 1952-72. 


65 




An African Tree of Life. Thomas G. 
Christensen. Maryknoll, NY: Orbis Books, 
1990, 184 pp., $17.95 (pb) 

Reviewed by Jacob A. Loewen 

Thomas G. Christensen is a Lutheran mis¬ 
sionary to the Gbaya and professor at the 
theological school in Meiganga, Cameroon. 
This volume (ASM #14) is based on his 
doctoral dissertation presented at the Lu¬ 
theran School of Theology in Chicago in 
1984. It represents a welcome model of con¬ 
textualizing the message of salvation through 
Jesus Christ in a West African society. 

Central to much of Gbaya ritual in initi¬ 
ation, purification, reconciliation, and con¬ 
secration is the sore tree, which the people 
call “our sore-cool-making-thing.” Its 
branches placed between combatants, in¬ 
dividual or collective, stop their aggression. 
Sore leaves in water are sure to remove 
evil, ill will, revenge, etc. Best of all, Gbaya 
Christians now call Jesus “our sore- cool- 
making-thing.” 

This study is a virtual sandwich with the 
first and the last two chapters dealing with 
contextual application and the “meat” 
being the ethnographic description of 
Gbaya ritual (ch. 4-11). 

The value of the book lies in its sympa¬ 
thetic treatment of Gbaya ritual—albeit, 
largely through Gbaya Christian eyes—the 
openness it manifests in helping Gbaya 
Christians contextualize the gospel, and 
finally, in its appeal to sending churches to 
develop their own new metaphors and 
rituals to make the Christ of the gospels as 
relevant to their technological society as 
the sore metaphors have made God to the 
Gbaya. 


From Abbotsford , British Columbia, Jacob 
A. Loewen is a retired missionary and 
translation consultant. 


Doing Theology with the Masai. By Doug 
Priest, Jr. Pasadena, CA: William Carey 
Library, 1990, 240 pp., $10.95 (pb) 

Reviewed by David W. Shenk 

Doing Theology with the Masai (also 
spelled Maasai) is a quest for the contex- 
tualization of the Maasai approach to sac¬ 
rifice. For ten years, Doug Priest’s family 
served with the Christian Missionary Fel¬ 
lowship among the Maasai in Tanzania and 
Kenya. A critical question they struggled 

66 


with was the extent to which traditional 
sacrificial practices could be expressed 
within the Christian community. This book 
attempts to answer that question. 

To me, the strongest chapters are those 
describing Maasai sacrificial practices and 
their symbols. Those chapters present sig¬ 
nificant data that will be helpful to any 
missionary attempting to understand the 
Maasai. It is also a valuable anthropological 
contribution. A specific awareness of con¬ 
temporary anthropological research into 
the phenomenon of sacrifice would have 
strengthened the book. 

Priest differentiates between the Old 
Testament sacrifices that could be classi¬ 
fied as negative (atonement for sin) or 
positive (thanksgiving), and applies it to 
the Maasai sacrificial system. He concludes 
that any sacrifices related to atonement 
should be terminated by Maasai who be¬ 
come Christians, because Christ is the final 
sacrifice. Sacrifices of thanksgiving may 
continue providing there is no mediational 
priest involved, because Christ is our high 
priest. 

The issues raised are pertinent, and per¬ 
haps Priest’s conclusions are correct. How¬ 
ever, the hermeneutic and ecclesiology 
leading to these conclusions troubles me. 
The opening statement of the book indi¬ 
cates that Priest’s perceptions are juxta¬ 
posed against those of a Maasai pastor who 
has served his people many years. That 
pastor feels that Christian Maasai cannot 
participate in any part of the sacrificial 
system. Priest disagrees, and this book is a 
defense of his position. 

There is little evidence that Priest’s con¬ 
clusions have developed out of a vigorous 
hermeneutic within the believing Maasai 
community. Only several references indi¬ 
cate conversations of these issues with the 
Maasai believers. There is no indicated 
awareness of the hermeneutic which other 
churches in other societies within Kenya 
have engaged in in relation to the sacrifi¬ 
cial system, nor is there acknowledgment 
that in earlier years hundreds of Kenyan 
Christians died as martyrs for refusing to 
participate in traditional sacrificial systems. 
Why did they feel so deeply about non¬ 
participation that they would lay down 
their lives? 

I would have enjoyed more theologizing. 
The sacrificial system unlocks the key to 
the worldview of a people at a profound 
level. The descriptive passages are intri¬ 
guing and most valuable. Yet the book does 
not really open the door into the 
worldview behind those sacrifices. How¬ 
ever, Priest’s book can be a valuable first 
step in understanding the significance of a 


sacrificial system among a people who are 
turning toward Christ. 


Previously a missionary in Somalia and 
Kenya , David W. Shenk is now Director of 
Overseas Ministries for Eastern Mennonite 
Board of Missions, Salunga, Pennsylvania. 


The Quiet Revolution: The Story of a 
Living Faith Around the World. Edited by 
Robin Keeley. Grand Rapids: Wm. B. 
Eerdmans Publishing Co., 1989, 384 pp., 
$16.95 (pb) 

Reviewed by Hans Kasdorf 

This is another volume in the Handbook 
Series created by Lion Publishing. An in¬ 
ternational team of editors have enlisted 
63 contributors to give an up-to-date por¬ 
trait of the Christian movement that is truly 
global in scope, content, and interpreta¬ 
tion. 

The book has three sections: part one 
treats larger Christian denominations as 
families or communions; part two describes 
Christianity on six continents; part three 
deals with the theoretical aspects of the 
Christian faith and how it is most appro¬ 
priately disseminated and applied. 

While the editors attempt to present a 
historical overview of the worldwide 
church, their approach to history is 
missiological and universal, rather than 
strictly historical and Western. Those look¬ 
ing for church history must look elsewhere; 
those looking for a kaleidoscope of con¬ 
temporary expressions of Christian faith 
will find this book helpful. 

Teachers and students of mission history, 
world Christianity, and missiology will use 
this as a reference book for its wealth of 
current information on the church in the 
global village, with its unique opportunities 
and challenges, crises and chaos. A general 
index, maps, charts, diagrams, and colored 
photographs add to its value and strength. 

As one reviewer notes: “During the last 
generation a quiet revolution has been 
taking place. A faith once dominated by 
Westerners has taken off into Africa, Asia, 
and Latin America.” Such is the nature of 
Christianity—it is “a dynamic faith, ever 
growing and spreading throughout the 
world.” 


Hans Kasdorf is Professor of World Mission 
at Mennonite Brethren Biblical Seminary, 
Fresno, California. 


MISSION FOCUS INDEX 

Volume IS (1990) 


Besides an alphabetical author listing, this 
index is divided into two main subject 
categories: (A) General Missions and (B) 
Area Studies. Each subject entry is listed 
by author, title, and Mission Focus volume 
number and issue. In addition, each entry 
is assigned a number in italic for ease in 
cross-referencing. Please note that this index 
continues the indexes for volumes 1-10 found 
in the December 1982 issue; thereafter up¬ 
dated in the December issue of each volume 
of Mission Focus. 


Author Index 

FRIESEN, Albert. The Missionary and 
Music; 18:4, 239. 

GRABER, David. Experiencing Native 
American Music: Living with Cheyenne 
and Crow Indians; 18:4, 243. 

GREEN, Stanley W. Anabaptism and Ec- 
clesiology in a Context of Plurality; 18:2, 
233. 

JANTZ, Hugo. Old and New Possibilities 
for Mission in Eastern Europe; 18:1, 
228. 

KRABILL, James. William Wade Harris 
(1860-1929): African Evangelist and 
“Ethnohymnologist”; 18:4, 241. 

KREIDER, Alan. The Growth of the Early 
Church: Reflections on Recent Litera¬ 
ture; 18:3, 235. 

LIECHTY, Joseph. Missionaries and Social 
Change; 18:3, 236. 

OYER, Mary. Evolving African Hymnody; 
18:4, 240. 

RAMSEYER, Robert. Sixteenth-Century 
Insights and Contemporary Reality: Re¬ 
flections on Thirty-Five Years in Mis¬ 
sion; 18:2, 232. 

RINDZINSKI, Milka How My Understand¬ 
ing of Mission Has Developed; 18:2, 234. 

SCHMIDT, Henry J. How My Understand¬ 
ing of Mission Has Developed; 18:3, 
237. 

SHENK, N. Gerald. Not a Vacuum But a 
Drought: Faith Amid Crisis in Socialism; 
18:1, 227. 

STUTZMAN, Linford. An Incarnational 
Approach to Mission in Modern Affluent 
Societies; 18:1, 229. 

WALLS, A. F. Conversion and Christian 
Continuity; 18:2, 231. 

WENGER, Malcolm. Sing to the Lord a 
New Song; 18:4, 242. 

ZIMMERMAN, Earl. Perspective on Mis¬ 
sion from Matthew s Gospel; 18:1, 230. 


A. GENERAL MISSIONS 


HISTORY AND THEOLOGY OF MISSION 


Anabaptist Theology of Mission 

GREEN, Stanley W. Anabaptism and Ec- 
clesiology in a Context of Plurality; 18:2, 
233. 

RAMSEYER, Robert. Sixteenth-Century 
Insights and Contemporary Reality: Re¬ 
flections on Thirty-Five Years in Mis¬ 
sion; 18:2, 232. 

Conversion 

WALLS, A. F. Conversion and Christian 
Continuity; 18:2, 231. 

History of Mission 

KREIDER, Alan. The Growth of the Early 
Church: Reflections on Recent Litera¬ 
ture; 18:3, 235. 

Mission in the Bible 

ZIMMERMAN, Earl. Perspective on Mis¬ 
sion from Matthew’s Gospel; 18:1, 230. 


ENVIRONMENT, SOCIETY, AND 
DEVELOPMENT 


Culture and Anthropology 

FRIESEN, Albert. The Missionary and 
Music; 18:4, 239. 

GRABER, David. Experiencing Native 
American Music: Living with Cheyenne 
and Crow Indians; 18:4, 243. 

KRABILL, James. William Wade Harris 
(1860-1929): African Evangelist and 
“Ethnohymnologist”; 18:4, 241. 

OYER, Mary. Evolving African Hymnody; 
18:4, 240. 

WENGER, Malcolm. Sing to the Lord a 
New Song; 18:4, 242. 

Social Order, Social Change 

LIECHTY, Joseph. Missionaries and Social 
Change; 18:3, 236. 

SHENK, N. Gerald. Not a Vacuum But a 
Drought: Faith Amid Crisis in Socialism; 
18:1, 227. 


FORMS OF MINISTRY AND WITNESS 


Missions and the Missionary 

FRIESEN, Albert. The Missionary and 
Music; 18:4, 239. 

LIECHTY, Joseph. Missionaries and Social 
Change; 18:3, 236. 

RAMSEYER, Robert. Sixteenth-Century 
Insights and Contemporary Reality: Re¬ 
flections on Thirty-Five Years in Mis¬ 
sion; 18:2, 232. 


RINDZINSKI, Milka. How My Under¬ 
standing of Mission Has Developed; 
18:2, 234. 

SCHMIDT, Henry J. How My Understand¬ 
ing of Mission Has Developed; 18:3, 
237. 

Strategy for Missions 

JANTZ, Hugh. Old and New Possibilities 
for Mission in Eastern Europe; 18:1, 
228. 

Structure of the Church for Mission 

STUTZMAN, Linford. An Incarnational 
Approach to Mission in Modern Affluent 
Societies; 18:1, 229. 

Worship, Liturgy, Prayer 

FRIESEN, Albert. The Missionary and 
Music; 18:4, 239. 

GRABER, David. Experiencing Native 
American Music: Living with Cheyenne 
and Crow Indians; 18:4, 243. 

KRABILL, James. William Wade Harris 
(1860-1929): African Evangelist and 
“Ethnohymnologist”; 18:4; 241. 

OYER, Mary. Evolving African Hymnody; 
18:4, 240. 

WENGER, Malcolm. Sing to the Lord a 
New Song; 18:4, 242. 

B. AREA STUDIES 


AFRICA 


OYER, Mary. Evolving African Hymnody; 
18:4, 240. 

Ivory Coast 

KRABILL, James. William Wade Harris 
(1860-1929): African Evangelist and 
“Ethnohymnologist”; 18:4, 241. 


EUROPE 


Eastern Europe 

JANTZ, Hugh. Old and New Possibilities 
for Mission in Eastern Europe; 18:1, 
228. 

SHENK, N. Gerald. Not a Vacuum But a 
Drought: Faith Amid Crisis in Socialism; 
18:1, 227. 


NORTH AMERICA 


Native Americans 

GRABER, David. Experiencing Native 
American Music: Living with Cheyenne 
and Crow Indians; 18:4, 242. 
WENGER, Malcolm. Sing to the Lord a 
New Song; 18:4, 242. 


67 



Editorial 


Having recently worked through a manuscript on the 
concept of culture in Protestant missions by Charles R. 
Taber has impressed on me the multiple dimensions of 
the Christian mission. Even though missionaries may focus 
their efforts on a specific task—i.e., preaching the gos¬ 
pel—their presence and impact can touch many aspects 
of life, often in ways never anticipated. Taber observes 
that all people operated with a pre-critical understanding 
of culture prior to the nineteenth century. There were no 
conceptual tools available before that time. Only in the 
nineteenth century did people begin to speak about 
culture as an abstraction and begin to develop theories 
and tools of cultural analysis that would enable compara¬ 
tive and analytical studies. Prior to this time every group 
of people the world over thought of themselves as having 
culture and other people as being culturally deficient. 

This change in outlook was aided and abetted by several 
developments. A major reason for this change was the 
Western military, economic, political, and cultural inser¬ 
tion in other cultures worldwide from the sixteenth 
century onward. The sheer change in the frequency and 
range of intercultural contact was bound to pose new 
questions. 

A second contributor to this change in perspective was 
the modern missionary movement. In contrast to other 
aspects of the Western movement throughout the world, 
the Christian mission had at the center of its purpose 
personal transformation, which it assumed would be man¬ 
ifested in all aspects of life. Soldiers or merchants or 
settlers entertained no such ideas. They either pursued a 
policy of minimal interference with the local culture, as 
in the case of military expeditions, or assumed displace¬ 
ment of local peoples and their folkways, as in the case of 
settlers. What is often criticized in missionary practice can 
be traced to the fact that missionaries operated with the 
only known models and without the benefit of critical 
understandings. 

By 1850, more and more missionaries and mission 
leaders were aware of the wrongness of this approach. 


Out of this awareness came insistence on the importance 
of the indigenous culture, indigenous church, and vernac¬ 
ular languages. This insight did not, to be sure, produce 
instant results. It had to be worked out in one area after 
the other. In retrospect, the pace seems to have been 
unconscionably slow, and there were setbacks along the 
way. 

One of the areas in which there was relatively late 
recognition of its importance for the development of the 
church in loco was liturgy and music. Yet today, as we 
observe the church in all its manifestations in specific 
cultures throughout the world, we notice that one of the 
most profound and reliable indicators that a particular 
church has struck root in the soil and heart of a people is 
the extent to which that church sings its faith in Jesus 
Christ using indigenous materials. A church which con¬ 
tinues to rely on translated music usually has not fully 
internalized the Christian message. As Albert Friesen 
shows, there were pioneers who saw the importance of 
this early on, but their examples and challenges were 
generally ignored. 

The story of the Dida people, guided by the Prophet 
Harris, is highly unusual, as James Krabill shows. In this 
instance, an indigenous church from the beginning used 
only indigenous materials as the medium for expressing 
their newly-adopted Christian faith. This has led to a 
prolific production of music among the Dida Harrist 
Church. The path followed by American Indian Christians 
has been much slower, as both Malcolm Wenger and 
David Graber show. Mary Oyer provides us with some 
useful general observations from the viewpoint of one who 
moved from a project in ethnohymnody among her own 
people—the North American Mennonites—to ethnomu- 
sicology in various parts of Africa, including African 
varieties of ethnohymnody. Taken together, these authors 
provide sufficient material to prod us all to think afresh 
about the faith/culture issue, especially in terms of music 
as a major element in Christian worship. 

—Wilbert R. Shenk 


POSTMASTER: Send Form 3579 to Box 370, Elkhart, IN 46515-0370